PROFESSIONAL AUDIO WORKSTATION

Reference Guide

E

Table of contents

Table of contents
SONG screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Song List page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Saving/loading a song . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Setting page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Make various settings for the current song . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Song Edit page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Deleting/copying/optimizing songs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Tempo Map page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Programming the tempo map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Shut Down page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Shut down the AW4416 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

QUICK REC screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Quick Rec page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Simultaneously recording 16 inputs/16 tracks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

MASTERING screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Write CD page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Using a CD-RW drive to create an audio CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

CD PLAY screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
CD Play page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Use the CD-RW drive to play an audio CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

SET UP screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Patch IN page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Patching a signal to a channel/track . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Patch OUT page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Patch signals to output jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Patch Lib page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Store or recall patching settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 D.in Setup page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Make word clock/cascade settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Monitor page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Monitor the digital input signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Dither Out page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Specify dithering and word length of the digital outputs . . . . . . . 24 Dither TRK page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Specify dithering and word length for tracks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

— Reference Guide

iii

Appendix SCENE

AUTO MIX

EDIT

TRACK

SAMP. AUX7/EFF1 AUX1– HOME PAD AUX8/EFF2 AUX6

DYN/ EQ/ATT PAN/ DLY /GRP ROUTE

VIEW

MIDI

UTILITY

FILE

SET UP

CD PLAY

MASTER- QUICK SONG REC ING

Table of contents Solo Setup page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Make solo settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

FILE screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Backup page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Backup a song . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Restore page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Restore backed-up songs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Disk Util. page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Format or erase a disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

UTILITY screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Oscillator page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Using the test tone oscillator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Prefer.1 page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Make overall settings for the AW4416 (1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Prefer.2 page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Make overall settings for the AW4416 (2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Prefer.3 page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Make overall settings for the AW4416 (3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

MIDI screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
MIDI Setup page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Make basic MIDI settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 MIDI Sync page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Make settings related to MIDI synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 PGM Asgn. page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Assign a scene number to each program change number . . . . . . 43

VIEW screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
CH View page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 View all parameters of a channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Library page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Store or recall channel settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

PAN/ROUTE screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Pan 1–16/Pan17–24/Pan MONI pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Set pan and routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Pair CH/Pair BUS pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Set channel/bus pairing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

iv

— Reference Guide

. . . . . . . . 65 Set delay and phase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 HOME screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Monitor the output levels of buses 1–8/AUX buses 1–8 . . . . 54 Library page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 EQ and attenuation settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 SET UP CD PLAY MASTER. . . . . . . . . . . .Table of contents EQ/ATT/GRP screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 AUX7/EFF1 and AUX8/EFF2 screens . . . . . . 69 Edit internal effects 1/2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Set and cancel fader groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 EQ/Att page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pre/Pst MONI pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 FaderGrp page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Make on/off and pre/post settings for the effect sends . Edit page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .QUICK SONG REC ING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pre/Pst MONI pages . . . 59 Set and cancel mute groups . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Monitor the output levels of the OMNI OUT jacks and stereo output . . . . . . . . . 65 MIDI Library page . . . . . 56 Store or recall EQ settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 1–24/Rtn page . . . . . . 76 Bus page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 FILE DYN/DLY screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 MONITOR page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Edit page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dly/øMONI pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Monitor the input level of the input channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Pre/Pst IN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Storing and recalling dynamics processor settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 AUX1–AUX6 screens . . . . 67 Make on/off and pre/post settings for the AUX sends . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Mute Grp page . . . . . . . . . AUX7/EFF1 AUX1– HOME PAD AUX8/EFF2 AUX6 DYN/ EQ/ATT PAN/ DLY /GRP ROUTE VIEW Dly/ø1–16. . . 69 Eff. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Monitor the input levels of the monitor channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 UTILITY Dyn. . . . . 69 Library page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dly/ø17–24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Dynamics processor parameter settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 — Reference Guide v Appendix SCENE AUTO MIX EDIT TRACK SAMP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Store or recall an effect program . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Omni/ST page . . 67 Pre/Pst IN. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . 107 Edit virtual tracks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 WavImport page . . . . . 79 SAMP. . . . . . . . . . 80 From Rgn. . . . . . . . . 95 Mark Adj. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Adjust or erase locate points or markers . . . List page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 Import CD-DA to an audio track . . . . . 115 Main page . . . . . . 111 TR Import page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 PAD Edit page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Editing a sample pad . . . . . . . . 94 Stereo page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page . .Table of contents Option page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 CD Import page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Monitor the output level of option I/O cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .TR Edit page . . . . . . . . . . 113 AUTOMIX screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 Memory page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 Import a WAV file to an audio track . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Track page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PAD screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 TR Edit page . . . . . . . . 97 EDIT screen . 90 Viewing the recorded content for each track . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 Make basic automix settings . . . . . . . 86 Trig. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 V. . . 95 Playing or erasing the stereo track . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 TR View page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 WAV Import page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 vi — Reference Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Store or recall automix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 TRACK screen . . . . . 107 CD Import page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Recording and playing sampling pad operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Switching virtual tracks . . . . . 99 Edit tracks . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Assign a WAV file to a sampling pad . . . . . . 99 V. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Assign CD-DA to a sampling pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Assign a region to a sampling pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Import a track from an existing song . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Sort page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Effects Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 RCL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Scene Mem page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Mixer section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Popup messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 Edit events off-line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Store or recall a scene . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 Appendix . 50 vii AUTO MIX EDIT TRACK SAMP. . . . . . . . . . . AUX7/EFF1 AUX1– HOME PAD AUX8/EFF2 AUX6 DYN/ EQ/ATT PAN/ DLY /GRP ROUTE VIEW MIDI UTILITY FILE SET UP CD PLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Preset Effects Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .QUICK SONG REC ING Appendix SCENE — Reference Guide SCENE screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 MIDI data format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Recorder section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 Specify the fade time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Control I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Preset EQ Program Parameters . . . . . 24 Preset Dynamics Program Parameters . . . . Safe page . 48 Dimensions . . . . . . . . 121 View fader events as a bar graph . . . . . . . . .Table of contents Fader Edit page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Preset Dynamics Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Display message list . . . . . . . . . . 127 Make fader recall safe settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Fade Time page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 General Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 Sort scenes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Dynamics Processors . . . . . . . . . 121 Event List page . . . . . . . 122 MASTER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Reference guide

Reference guide
The reference guide explains all screens and all pages that appear in the display. Use it like a dictionary when you wish to learn more about the functions in the screen, or to find the page from which to execute a desired operation.

How to read the reference guide
Here’s how to read the reference guide.

A Screen name B Page name/title C [Function]
A brief summary of the functions of this page.

1

EQ/ATT/GRP screen
EQ/Att page
EQ and attenuation settings
[Function]
Make four-band EQ and attenuation settings for the selected channel.

2

D [Key operation]
The procedure for using the top panel keys to access this page.

3 4 5

1

2

3

4

[Key operation]
• [EQ] key ¡ [F1] key (EQ/Att) key • Repeatedly press the [EQ] key until the screen shown at the right appears.

E [Mouse operation]
The procedure for using the mouse to access this page.

[Mouse operation]
M button ¡ EQ button ¡ EQ/Att tab

5 6 7

F [Screen functions]
Explanations of the function of each item or operation in this page.

6

[Screen functions]
A EQ ON button
This switches EQ on/off. When this page is displayed, you can use the [ENTER] key to switch this button on/off regardless of the cursor location. the EQ type to H.SHELF (shelving), and turning it all the way in the counter-clockwise direction will switch the EQ type to LPF (low pass filter). Range: 10–0.10, HPF/L.SHELF (LOW band only), LPF/H.SHELF (HIGH band only)

G I Additional functions in the page
Explanations of the additional functions assigned to the function keys ([F1]–[F5]) in this page.

7
I Additional functions in the EQ/ Att page
In the EQ/Att page you can press the [SHIFT] key to assign the following additional functions to the [F1]–[F2] and [F5] keys.

8
EQ/ATT/GRP screen

H [Procedure]
The procedure for performing a specific operation in this page.

G Copying the attenuation setting to all channels [Procedure]
1. Access the EQ/Att page for the copy source channel, and move the cursor to the ATT. knob. 2. Press the [SHIFT] key + [F5] key.
A CONFIRMATION popup window will appear, asking you to confirm the copy.

F1

F2

F5

• [F1] (FLAT) key
Reset all bands to a boost/cut amount of 0.0 dB (off if HPF/LPF is selected).

• [F2] (BAND FLAT) key
Reset only the selected band to a boost/cut amount of 0.0 dB (off if HPF/LPF is selected).

If the cursor is at a location other than the ATT. knob, a message of “Can’t Copy This Parameter” will appear, and the copy will not occur.

• [F5] (COPY ATT. TO ALL) key
Copy the attenuation setting of the selected channel to all channels. (However, the stereo output channel is excepted.)

3. To execute the copy, move the cursor to the OK button and press the [ENTER] key.
Only the attenuation setting will be copied. If you wish to copy EQ settings, you must store the settings in the library and recall them into the copy destination channel. For the procedure refer to page 47.

viii

— Reference Guide

SONG screen
Song List page
Saving/loading a song
[Function]
Load a song from hard disk, or save the current song to hard disk.

1

[Key operation]
• [SONG] key ¡ [F1] (Song List) key • Repeatedly press the [SONG] key until the display shown at right appears.

[Mouse operation]
M button ¡ SONG button ¡ Song List tab

2 3

4 5 6

[Screen functions]
A Song list
This lists the songs that are saved on the internal hard disk. The highlighted line is the current song, and the line enclosed by a dotted line is the song selected for loading. Use the [DATA/ JOG] dial to select the song for loading. This list shows the following data for each song. • SONG NAME .....First 16 characters of the song name • SAVED AT...........Date and time at which the song was last saved • SIZE ...................Size of the song • BIT/FS ................Quantization (bit number)/ sampling frequency of the song • PRT ....................Song protect on/off (¡ P.2)

C COMMENT
This shows the comment of the song selected by the cursor. This field is for display only, and cannot be edited. Comments for other than the current song will be displayed as “*** Other Song Comment ***”.

D LOAD button
This button loads the song enclosed by the dotted line in the list.

E SAVE button
This button saves the current song.

Tip!
If song protect is on, the PRT column will show “ ”.

The location of the dotted frame in the list does not affect the save location of the current song. It is not possible to change the save location of the current song.

Tip!
For details on loading or saving songs, refer to Operation Guide “Chapter 11. Song management.”

B SELECTED SONG NAME
This shows the name of the song selected by the cursor. This field is for display only, and cannot be edited.

F NEW SONG button
This button creates a new song. For details on creating a new song, refer to Operation Guide “Chapter 5. Recording on the AW4416.”

— Reference Guide

1

SONG

SONG screen

Setting page
Make various settings for the current song
[Function]
Make various settings for the current song, such as editing the song name, selecting the counter display method, and selecting the time code frame rate.

1 3 5

2 4 6

[Key operation]
• [SONG] key ¡ [F2] (Setting) key • Repeatedly press the [SONG] key until the display shown at the right appears.

[Mouse operation]
M button ¡ SONG button ¡ Setting tab

7 8

9

[Screen functions]
A NAME EDIT button
This button edits the song name of the current song.

Tip!
The display method you select here will also affect how the track editing range is specified (EDIT screen TR Edit page), and how locate points are displayed (TRACK screen Mark Adj. page etc.).

B SONG NAME
This displays the song name of the current song.

C COMMENT EDIT button
This button edits the comment of the current song.

F PROTECT
This specifies the protect setting of the song. When you move the cursor to the button in the PROTECT area and press the [ENTER] key, the button will alternate between ON and OFF. When protect is on, it will not be possible to edit or record tracks, edit the sampling pads, or set/change locate points.

D COMMENT
This displays the comment of the current song.

E DISPLAY
You can select one of the following three display methods for the current location that is shown in the counter/level meter and in the counter in the upper part of the display. G SECOND button The counter will be displayed as time (hours/ minutes/seconds/milliseconds). G TIME CODE button The counter will be displayed as time code (hours/minutes/seconds/frames/sub-frames). G MEASURE button The counter will be displayed as measures (measures/beats/ticks).

G FRAME RATE buttons
Use the following four buttons to select the frame rate of the time code. The frame rate setting will affect the counter time code display and the MTC that is transmitted and received. • 24 button ...........24 fps • 25 button ...........25 fps • 30 button ...........30 fps (30 non-drop frame) • 30D button ........29.97 fps (30 drop-frame)

If you wish to use MTC to synchronize the AW4416 and an external device, you must use the FRAME RATE buttons to match the frame rate of the two devices.

2

— Reference Guide

10.) Move the cursor to the TOP area. noise or a click may be heard during playback.00 Song 00:00:10:00. 20.” I RGN.00 Song 00:00:05:00. For details on the start point and end point. set the region fade time to a longer value. FADE TIME (region fade time) This parameter automatically fades-in/fades-out the starting and ending point of regions. Time code top= 00:00:00:00. The default setting is 5 msec. refer to the explanation in “TRACK screen/Mark Adj.00 Time code top= 00:00:05:00. page. Tip! If the level changes abruptly at the start/end point of a region. You can select from 3. If you notice noise or clicks. the start point and end point will be adjusted automatically. and use the [DATA/JOG] dial to adjust the hours/minutes/seconds/frames/subframes value.00”.00 • Changing the time code Top will affect the time code indications in the display and the MTC that the AW4416 transmits and receives.00”– ”24:00:00:00. it is not possible to set the region fade time to 0 msec. • When you modify the time code Top. For this reason. (Negative values cannot be set.SONG screen H TOP This adjusts the time code time that corresponds to the beginning of the song (“time code top”) in the range of “00:00:00:00. or 45 msec as the time over which the fade-in/out will take place (“region fade time”).00 Time code display 00:00:00:00.00 Time code display 00:00:05 5:00. — Reference Guide 3 . 5.

.... D OPTIMIZE button This button optimizes the song marked by the “E” symbol. or optimizing them... F Parameter area When you move the cursor to one of the buttons 2–5. Tip! • The current song cannot be deleted. copying..” 4 — Reference Guide ........... Only one song can be selected as the import source for mixer data.. such as by deleting.. Song Management... • Depending on the operation..... 1 [Mouse operation] M button ¡ SONG button ¡ Song Edit tab 2 3 6 5 4 [Screen functions] A Song list This lists the songs saved on the internal hard disk...... An “E” symbol displayed at the left edge of the list indicates a song selected for editing.. audio files not currently used by that song (e. the operation (DELETE/COPY/OPTIMIZE/MIXER IMPORT) that can be executed by that button will appear in this area. refer to Operation Guide “Chapter 11. The current song cannot be selected as the import source.Quantization (bit number)/ sampling frequency of the song • PRT ..... the “E” symbol that indicates the editing selection will alternately appear and disappear. B DELETE button This button deletes the song marked by the “E” symbol from the internal hard disk.. • A deleted song is gone forever... [Key operation] • [SONG] key ¡ [F3] (Song Edit) key • Repeatedly press the [SONG] key until the screen shown at the right appears. Optimize can be executed on the current song... When optimize is executed.SONG screen Song Edit page Deleting/copying/optimizing songs [Function] Edit songs saved on the internal hard disk.. For details on using each operation.......... • SONG NAME ..... Optimize can be executed on only one song at a time......Date and time at which the song was last saved • SIZE ..Song protect on/off status C COPY button This button copies the song marked by the “E” symbol onto the internal hard disk. undo files) will be deleted. The current song is highlighted in the list. E MIXER IMP (mixer import) button This button imports the mixer settings (scene memory/automix/tempo map/libraries) from the song marked by the “E” symbol into the current song....g..Size of the song • BIT/FS. Tip! • When you use the cursor to select a song in the list and press the [ENTER] key..First 16 characters of the song name • SAVED AT ..... Use this operation with caution. you may be able to select more than one song for editing.. The following information is also displayed in the song list.

In the TEMPO area you can make the following settings for the STEP/ MEASURE/BEAT/TEMPO items. The numerator and denominator of the time signature can be set independently. time signature data of 4/4 is already input at measure 1. If you move the cursor to the MEASURE area and specify the same measure number as an existing time signature. If you move the tempo data beyond the previous or next tempo data. their step numbers will be exchanged automatically. In the METER area you can make the following settings for the STEP/MEASURE/METER items. • It is not possible to move the time signature data of measure 1. • It is not possible to place two time signatures at the same measure. their step numbers will be exchanged automatically. G STEP Move the cursor to this area and rotate the [DATA/JOG] dial to select the number (step number) of the time signature data. 1 2 [Mouse operation] M button ¡ SONG button ¡ Tempo Map tab 3 4 5 6 [Screen functions] A METER In this area you can specify the time signature.SONG screen Tempo Map page Programming the tempo map [Function] Program tempo data and time signature data into the tempo map. starting at the time signature data of the lowest-numbered measure. starting at the tempo data of the lowest-numbered measure. The area enclosed by the dotted frame is the currently selected time signature data. the previous time signature data will be deleted. G STEP Move the cursor to this area and rotate the [DATA/JOG] dial to select the number (step number) of the tempo data. G MEASURE Move the cursor to this area and rotate the [DATA/JOG] dial to modify the measure number of the time signature. The area enclosed by the dotted line is the currently selected tempo data. G MEASURE/BEAT Move the cursor to this area and rotate the [DATA/JOG] dial to modify the location (measure/beat) of the tempo data. If you move the time signature beyond the previous or next time signature data. The step number is assigned consecutively. Tip! When the AW4416 is in the default state. — Reference Guide 5 . G METER Move the cursor to this area and rotate the [DATA/JOG] dial to specify the time signature (2/1–8/8) for that measure. [Key operation] • [SONG] key ¡ [F4] (Tempo Map) key • Repeatedly press the [SONG] key until the screen shown at the right appears. B TEMPO In this area you can specify tempo data. The step number is assigned consecutively.

• [F2] (INS) key This key inserts time signature data or tempo data. If you move the cursor to the MEASURE/BEAT area and specify the same location as an existing tempo data. This is the same function as the 5 INS button. F1 F2 F3 • The tempo data at step number 1 cannot be moved. • It is not possible to place two tempo data at the same location. 6 — Reference Guide . Move the cursor to the button and press the [ENTER] key to switch between METER and TEMPO. E INS button When you move the cursor to this button and press the [ENTER] key. C EDIT SELECT button Use this button to specify whether you will edit time signature data (METER) or tempo data (TEMPO). the previous tempo data will be deleted. refer to Operation Guide “Chapter 15. This is the same function as the 6 DEL button.” • A maximum of 26 time signature data/tempo data items can be input in the METER area/ TEMPO area. new time signature/ tempo data will be inserted in the step number before the currently selected time signature/ tempo data. It is not possible to delete the time signature/ tempo data of step number 1.0. • [F3] (DEL) key This key deletes time signature data or tempo data. • [F1] (NEW) key This key inputs additional time signature data or tempo data. Tip! When the AW4416 is in the default state. This is the same function as the 4 NEW button.SONG screen G TEMPO Move the cursor to this area and rotate the [DATA/JOG] dial to set the tempo (BPM) of that location. the currently selected time signature/tempo data will be deleted. pressing the [SHIFT] key will assign the following functions to the [F1]–[F3] keys. new time signature/ tempo data will be added following the last step number that is currently input. in 0.1 steps. I Additional functions in the Tempo Map page In the Tempo Map page. D NEW button When you move the cursor to this button and press the [ENTER] key. tempo data of BPM=120 is already input at measure 1 beat 1. The BPM value can be set in a range of 20. MIDI.0–300. F DEL button When you move the cursor to this button and press the [ENTER] key. Tip! • For details on inputting the tempo map.

[Mouse operation] M button ¡ SONG button ¡ Shut Down tab 2 [Screen functions] A Current song status This area displays various information on the last-saved song. it will be overwritten by the new data. For details on the order in which the AW4416 and peripheral devices should be shut down. size. — Reference Guide 7 . When you perform the Save procedure and press the [ENTER] key. the cursor is fixed at the EXECUTE button.SONG screen Shut Down page Shut down the AW4416 [Function] Shut down the AW4416 so that the power can be turned off. so you can shut-down simply by pressing the [ENTER] key. B EXECUTE button In this page. Be sure to perform this shut-down operation before turning off the power of the AW4416. refer to Operation Guide “Important points you must observe. quantization bits.” If you turn off the power of the AW4416 without performing the shut-down operation. protect) shown here in the song list is the data for when the song was last saved. 1 [Key operation] • [SONG] key ¡ [F5] (Shut Down) key • Repeatedly press the [SONG] key until the screen shown at the right appears. audio data on the internal hard disk may be damaged. The data for the current song (date.

and tracks 1–16 will be in record-ready mode.. C EXECUTE button When you move the cursor to this button and press the [ENTER] key.QUICK REC screen Quick Rec page Simultaneously recording 16 inputs/16 tracks [Function] Instantly make settings (Quick Rec function) for simultaneously recording 16 input sources on audio tracks 1–16. • ANALOG 1–8 .. the same signal will be sent to tracks 1–8 and tracks 9–16.. In this case. and EQ for each channel will be reset.. • The output of all tracks 1–16 will be muted.. pan..... 8 — Reference Guide .. the settings of the AW4416 will change as follows.INPUT jacks 1–8 • SLOT1 1–8 .. • [REC TRACK SELECT] keys 1–16 will blink. • Input patch and recorder input patch settings will be switched as follows..INPUT 1–8 of an I/O card (slot 2) 3 Tip! It is possible to select the same source for 1 and 2... • Mix parameters such as fader....... [Key operation] [QUICK REC] key 1 2 [Mouse operation] M button ¡ Quick REC button [Screen functions] A Input select 1–8 B Input select 9–16 Select from the following input sources to send to audio tracks 1–8/9–16.INPUT 1–8 of an I/O card (slot 1) • SLOT2 1–8 ...

• For details on operation of the Quick Rec function.” — Reference Guide 9 QUICK REC 1 Input select 1–8 . you can simply press the [REC] key + [PLAY] key to simultaneously record 16 inputs on tracks 1–16. Patching.QUICK REC screen • Input jacks 1–8 • I/O card SLOT1 1–8 • I/O card SLOT2 1–8 • Input jacks 1–8 • I/O card SLOT1 1–8 • I/O card SLOT2 1–8 ×8 ×8 Input patch Mixer section Input channels 1–8 Input channels 9–16 Recorder input patch Recorder section Tracks 1–8 Tracks 9–16 2 Input select 9–16 After you have used the EXECUTE button. press the [ALL SAFE] key. Tip! • To defeat record-ready and mute settings for tracks 1–16. refer to Operation Guide “Chapter 8.

you must move the cursor to one of these buttons and press the [ENTER] key. will be written into the data area). finalize will be performed automatically. CD-RW media does not support Track At Once. CD-R media that was written using Track At Once will be finalized (information on track locations etc. Tip! If you used Disc At Once to write the data. x4. You must perform the finalize operation in order for CD-R media written using Track At Once to be playable on a CD player. and x6 buttons to select the writing speed (normal speed/double speed/ quad speed/x6 speed). 10 — Reference Guide . Before you execute the Write operation. the FINALIZE button will be displayed only if the TRACK AT ONCE button 3 is turned on. C TRACK AT ONCE button D DISC AT ONCE button Use these buttons to select the way in which data will be written to the CD-R/RW media (either Track At Once or Disc At Once). x2. E WRITE SPEED buttons Use the x1. B FINALIZE button When you press this button. For this reason.MASTERING screen Write CD page Using a CD-RW drive to create an audio CD [Function] Create an audio CD by writing the stereo track data of songs to CD-R/ RW media as CD audio tracks. [Key operation] [MASTERING] key 1 6 3 2 4 7 5 [Mouse operation] M button ¡ MAST button 8 9 K J L [Screen functions] A DRIVE Select the SCSI ID number of the internal or external CD-RW drive. Normally you should select the fastest speed supported by your CDRW drive.

J DEL Delete the currently selected audio track from the track list. and copy protect setting of songs that contain a stereo track.MASTERING screen F Track list Here you can select the stereo tracks that will be written as audio tracks on the CD. Move the cursor to this area and rotate the [DATA/JOG] dial to change the track number. converting it into 16 bit / 44. I Additional functions in the Write CD page In the Write CD page you can press the [SHIFT] key to assign the following functions to the [F1]–[F5] keys. By default. Move the cursor to this button and press the [ENTER] key to switch between the following two button displays. refer to Operation Guide “Chapter 17. Move the cursor to this area and use the [DATA/JOG] dial to select the stereo track that will be written to the corresponding audio track. Tip! If the button is displayed as PROHIBIT. • If a 24 bit / 44. • [F4] (INS) key Insert a new audio track after the track number currently selected in the track list 6. the lower 8 bits will be discarded when the data is written.37) • For details on the procedure of the Mastering function. • [F2] (CD UNLOAD) key Eject the tray of the CD-RW drive. stereo track data size. this test will not be performed. A maximum of approximately 650 MB can be written to 74 minute CD-R/RW media. G PERMIT Digital copying of the corresponding track will be permitted. G SONG NAME/SIZE/COPY This shows the song name.1 kHz stereo track is selected. G TRACK This is the track number on the CD. This is the same function as the NEW button 8. G PROHIBIT Digital copying of the corresponding track will be prohibited. F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 H NEW button Add a new audio track to the track list. This is the same function as the DEL button J.” • The track list will show only the stereo tracks of songs whose sampling frequency is 44. • [F1] (CD LOAD) key Close the tray of the CD-RW drive. Tip! If CD-R media containing data written using Track At Once is in the CD-RW drive. you can make settings so that the test will be performed before writing. I INS button Insert a new audio track after the track number currently selected in the track list. This is the same function as the INS button 9. the SONG NAME/SIZE/COPY area will indicate “–EXISTING–”. — Reference Guide 11 . an “ ” symbol will be displayed in the COPY column of the track list. Tip! • The AW4416 has a “writing test” function that can check before mastering is performed to see whether data transmission errors will occur.1 kHz. Stereo tracks of 48 kHz sampling frequency songs will not be displayed. Mastering.1 kHz data. or execute the test by itself. (¡ P. However. The track list shows the following information. • [F3] (NEW) key Add a new audio track to the track list 6. MASTERING L EXECUTE button Use this button to execute writing (mastering) to CD-R/RW media. G Total This shows the total of the SIZE column of the track list. K COPYRIGHT button Set the copy protect setting of the audio track currently selected in the track list. • [F5] (DEL) key Delete the audio track currently selected in the track list 6.

you can use the keys of the Transport section to operate the CD-RW drive. refer to Operation Guide “Chapter 17. The currently selected audio track will be highlighted. Key [PLAY] key [STOP] key [FF]/[REW] keys [ ]/[ ] keys CD-RW drive operation Play the CD Stop the CD Rewind/fast-forward the CD Select tracks D Track list This list shows the audio track numbers on the CD (TRACK area). all keys except the [CURSOR] keys. and the elapsed time of that track (TIME). B CD PLAY MODE button This button switches the CD Play function on/ off. (Use the STEREO fader to adjust the volume. the signals of other channels will not be sent to the stereo output channel. • The CD audio signal is routed through the stereo output channel and output from the STEREO OUT jacks. [ENTER] key.CD PLAY screen CD Play page Use the CD-RW drive to play an audio CD [Function] Use a CD-RW drive connected to the AW4416 to play back an audio CD (CD Play function). [Key operation] [CD PLAY] key 1 3 4 [Mouse operation] M button ¡ CD button 2 [Screen functions] A DRIVE Select the SCSI ID number of the internal or external CD-RW drive. and Transport section keys will be disabled. • For details on the CD Play function. Mastering. Tip! You can move the cursor to the track list and switch the playback track by using the [DATA/JOG] dial and the [ENTER] key. • While the CD PLAY MODE button 2 is on.) During this time. and the times for each track (TIME area). C Counter This displays the track number (TRACK) currently selected in the track list 4.” 12 — Reference Guide . When the CD PLAY function is on. [DATA/ JOG] dial.

• [F2] (CD UNLOAD) key Eject the tray of the CD-RW drive.CD PLAY screen I Additional functions in the CD Play page In the CD Play page you can press the [SHIFT] key to assign the following functions to the [F1]–[F2] keys. F1 F2 • [F1] (CD LOAD) key Close the tray of the CD-RW drive. — Reference Guide 13 CD PLAY .

In the SET UP screen. press the [SETUP] key + [F1] (CHANGE TAB) key to switch the tab. If the Patch IN tab is not assigned to the [F1] key when you press the [SETUP] key. The following signals can be assigned to each channel. [Key operation] • [SETUP] key ¡ [F1] (Patch IN) key (*1) • Repeatedly press the [SETUP] key until the display shown at right appears. the tabs displayed at the bottom are divided into two groups. Internal effects. For details on operation. *1. G Input channels 1–24 Display AD 1–AD 8 SL1-1 – SL1-8 SL2-1 – SL2-8 DIN L/DIN R SMP 1–SMP 8 MET Signal type INPUT jacks 1–8 INPUT 1–8 of an I/O card (slot 1) INPUT 1–8 of an I/O card (slot 2) L/R channels of the DIGITAL STEREO IN jack Sampling pads 1–8 Internal metronome G Return channels 1/2 Display EFF1 L/R EFF2 L/R AD 1/2–AD 7/8 SL1-1/2 – SL1-7/8 SL2-1/2 – SL2-7/8 DIN L/R Signal type Return of internal effect 1 Return of internal effect 2 INPUT jacks 1/2–7/8 INPUT 1/2–7/8 of an I/O card (slot 1) INPUT 1/2–7/8 of an I/O card (slot 2) DIGITAL STEREO IN jack (stereo) B EFFECT PATCH Select whether effects 1/2 will be used via AUX send/return (AUX7/AUX8).” 14 — Reference Guide .SET UP screen Patch IN page Patching a signal to a channel/track [Function] Assign signals to the inputs of input channels 1–24. refer to Operation Guide “Chapter 10. 1 2 3 [Mouse operation] M button ¡ SETU button ¡ Patch IN tab [Screen functions] A MIXER CHANNEL INPUT ASSIGN Select the signal that will be assigned to input channels 1–24 and return channels 1/2. return channels 1/2. and recorder tracks 1–16. or inserted into a specified channel (INSERT).

Patching.” • [F1] (CHANGE TAB) key Switch between the following two tab displays. — Reference Guide 15 . refer to Operation Guide “Chapter 8. G Recorder inputs 1–16 Display BUS 1–BUS 8 DIR 1–DIR16 Signal type Bus 1–8 Input channel direct out 1– 16 F1 SET UP I Additional functions in the Patch IN page In the Patch IN page you can press the [SHIFT] key to assign the following function to the [F1] key. Tip! For detai ls on operations in the Patch IN page.SET UP screen C RECORDER TRACK INPUT ASSIGN Here you can select the signals to be assigned to the inputs of tracks 1–16. The following signals can be assigned.

the tabs displayed at the bottom of the screen are divided into two groups. *1. The following signals can be assigned. If the Patch OUT tab is not assigned to the [F2] key when you press the [SETUP] key. In the SET UP screen. DIGITAL STEREO OUT jack. 1 2 4 3 [Mouse operation] M button ¡ SETU button ¡ Patch OUT tab [Screen functions] A OMNI OUT ASSIGN Select the signals that will be output from the OMNI OUT 1–4 jacks.ST OUT ASSIGN (digital stereo out assign) C ST OUT ASSIGN (stereo out assign) These respectively select the pair of signals that will be output from the DIGITAL STEREO OUT jack and the STEREO OUT jack.SET UP screen Patch OUT page Patch signals to output jacks [Function] Assign output signals to the OMNI OUT jacks. Display ST L/R BUS 1/2–BUS 7/8 DIR 1/2–DIR15/16 AUX 1/2–AUX 7/8 RDR 1/2–RDR15/ 16 Signal type Stereo output channel Bus 1/2–7/8 Input channel direct out 1/ 2–15/16 AUX buses 1/2–7/8 Recorder direct outs 1/2– 15/16 16 — Reference Guide . and the output channels of I/O cards. Display AUX 1–AUX 8 RDR 1–RDR16 ST L/ST R BUS 1–BUS8 DIR 1–DIR16 Signal type AUX buses 1–8 Recorder direct outputs 1– 16 L/R channels of the stereo output channel Bus 1–8 Input channel direct out 1– 16 B D. The following signals can be assigned. [Key operations] • [SETUP] key ¡ [F2] (Patch OUT) key (*1) • Repeatedly press the [SETUP] key until the display shown at right appears. STEREO OUT jacks. press [SHIFT] key + [F1] (CHANGE TAB) key to switch the tabs.

refer to Operation Guide “Chapter 8. Tip! For details on operation in the Patch OUT page.SET UP screen D OPTION I/O SLOT OUT ASSIGN This selects the signals that will be output from I/O cards installed in OPTION I/O slots 1/2. Display BUS 1–BUS 8 DIR 1–DIR16 AUX 1–AUX 8 RDR 1–RDR16 ST L/ST R Signal type Buses 1–8 Input channel direct out 1– 16 AUX buses 1–8 Recorder direct outputs 1– 16 L/R channels of the stereo output channel I Additional functions in the Patch OUT page In the Patch OUT page you can press the [SHIFT] key to assign the following function to the [F1] key. The following signals can be assigned. Patching.” — Reference Guide 17 . F1 • [F1] (CHANGE TAB) key Switch between the two tab displays.

B INPUT This indicates the input signal patched to the channel shown in 1. D TRACK 1-8/9-16 This area displays I symbols to indicate the track inputs to which buses 1–8 ( – ) and the direct output ( ) of the input channel currently selected by the [SEL] key are patched. *1. F TITLE EDIT button Use this button when you wish to edit the name (library title) of the patching settings saved in the library. E Input meter This shows the input level of the odd-numbered ¡ even-numbered channels adjacent to the channel selected in 1. press [SHIFT] key + [F1] (CHANGE TAB) key to switch the tabs. Patch library numbers in which no data has been stored will be displayed as “No Data!. or the output level of the stereo output channel. Refer to the explanation of the Patch IN page for the meaning of each abbreviation. 18 — Reference Guide . or recall previously-stored settings. an error message of “ERROR NO DATA TO RECALL” will be displayed.” and their title cannot be edited. buses to which that channel is assigned will be displayed as white characters on black background. and therefore its name cannot be changed. G RECALL button This button recalls the currently selected patching settings from the list. In the SET UP screen. C BUS This area shows the buses to which the signal of the channel is being sent. 4 6 7 8 [Mouse operation] M button ¡ SETU button ¡ Patch Lib tab 9 J K L [Screen functions] A SEL CH This indicates the channel currently selected by the [SEL] key. Move the cursor to the TITLE EDIT button and press the [ENTER] key to access the TITLE EDIT screen where you can input the name. the tabs displayed at the bottom of the screen are divided into two groups. Library number 0 is a recall-only preset. and the recall will not take place.SET UP screen Patch Lib page Store or recall patching settings [Function] Store the settings of the Patch IN/Patch OUT pages in the patch library. For buses 1–8 ( – ) and the stereo bus ( ). 1 2 35 [Key operation] • [SETUP] key ¡ [F3] (Patch Lib) key (*1) • Repeatedly press the [SETUP] key until the display shown at right appears. If the Patch Lib tab is not assigned to the [F3] key when you press the [SETUP] key. H STORE button Store the current patching settings. If you select a number in which nothing has been stored and attempt to recall it.

1 page ([UTILITY] key ¡ [F2] key). The NAME EDIT display will appear. 4. allowing you to input the name. data cannot be stored in it. This is the same function as the 6 TITLE EDIT button. I LIBRARY No. This is the same function as the 8 STORE button. Data can be stored only in library numbers 1–20. In this page. 5. Move the cursor to the STORE button and press the [ENTER] key. 3. K ROM Recall-only library number 0 is indicated by a write-prohibit symbol in this column. F1 F2 F3 F4 2. this popup window will not appear. • When you execute the Store operation. G To recall patching settings from a library [Procedure] 1. Move the cursor to the OK button and press the [ENTER] key. — Reference Guide 19 . Use the [DATA/JOG] dial to select the library number 1–20 into which you wish to store the settings. The Store operation will be executed. L Selected patching The patching settings enclosed by the dotted line in the library list will be the subject of the Store or Recall operation. 3. 2. The Recall operation will be executed. Input the library title. • [F2] (TITLE EDIT) key Use this to edit the name (library title) of patching settings saved in the library. This is the same function as the 7 RECALL button. (library number) This area displays library numbers 00–20. this popup window will not appear. Access the SET UP screen Patch Lib page. Move the cursor to the OK button and press the [ENTER] key. Access the SET UP screen Patch Lib page. 4. the patching settings that had been stored in that number will be erased. • [F3] (RECALL) key Recall the currently selected patching settings from the list.60. • [F4] (STORE) key Store the current patching settings. Tip! If STORE CONFIRMATION is turned “OFF” in the UTILITY screen Prefer.SET UP screen • Library number 0 is a recall-only preset. Use the [DATA/JOG] dial to select the library number that you wish to recall. • [F1] (CHANGE TAB) key Switch between the two tab displays. Move the cursor to the RECALL button and press the [ENTER] key.1 page ([UTILITY] key ¡ [F2] key). For details on inputting characters. I Additional functions in the Patch Lib page In the Patch Lib page you can press the [SHIFT] key to assign the following functions to the [F1]–[F4] keys. Tip! If RECALL CONFIRMATION is turned “OFF” in the UTILITY screen Prefer. you can use the [DATA/JOG] dial to select patching settings regardless of where the cursor is located. A confirmation message will appear. J LIBRARY TITLE This area displays the names assigned to the library settings. refer to Operation Guide P. G To store the patching settings into a library [Procedure] 1.

the tabs displayed at the bottom of the screen are divided into two groups.in Setup tab is not assigned to the [F4] key when you press the [SETUP] key. • Buttons marked by a / indicate that a digital audio signal is being input from the corresponding slot/jack. If the D. *1. • The highlighted button indicates the currently selected word clock source.in Setup tab 5 [Screen functions] A Slots 1/2 If an optional I/O card is installed in OPTION I/ O slots 1/2. a graphic will be displayed to show the type of I/O card. 1 3 4 [Mouse operation] M button ¡ SETU button ¡ D.in Setup page Make word clock/cascade settings [Function] Select the word clock source to which the AW4416 will synchronize. In the SET UP screen. G INT The internal clock of the AW4416 will be used as the clock source. select one of the following clock source to which the AW4416 will synchronize. • Buttons marked with an “X” indicate that no digital audio signal is being input from the corresponding slot/jack. and is synchronized with the internal clock of the AW4416. G D. B WORD CLOCK SOURCE From the following choices. In this page you can also make settings for stereo bus cascade connections. One pair of digital I/O card input channels 1/2–7/8 can be selected. press the [SHIFT] key + [F1] (CHANGE TAB) key to switch the tabs. 20 — Reference Guide .ST IN The word clock data included in the input signal of the DIGITAL STEREO IN jack will be the clock source. 2 [Key operation] • [SETUP] key ¡ [F4] (D.SET UP screen D. but is not synchronized with the internal clock of the AW4416.in Setup) key (*1) • Repeatedly press the [SETUP] key until the screen shown at the right appears. G SLOT 1 1/2–7/8 G SLOT 2 1/2–7/8 The input signal from a digital I/O card installed in OPTION I/O slots 1/2 will be the clock source. • Buttons without an X or / symbol indicate that a digital audio signal is being input from the corresponding slot/jack. Cards in which no card is installed will be displayed as “No Card!” G WCLK IN The word clock data included in the input signal of the WORD CLOCK IN jack will be the clock source.

When you move the cursor to the “DISABLE” button and press the [ENTER] key. you can press the [SHIFT] key to assign the following function to the [F1] key. I Additional functions in the D. the clock source must be set to “D. If you select an external clock as the clock source.SET UP screen C FS (sampling frequency) This shows the sampling frequency of the signal that is currently selected as the clock source.in Setup page In the D. In order for the device connected to the DIGITAL STEREO IN jack to be cascade-connected to the stereo bus. you can use the ATT.” will be displayed.” — Reference Guide 21 . a message of “CANNOT ASSIGN DIGITAL-ST-IN. F1 • [F1] (CHANGE TAB) key Switch between the two types of tab display. At this time. the control change frequency of the internal clock will be displayed at the right. be aware that the pitch will change when you return the clock source setting to “INT” and play back.ST IN.00%.in Setup page. E STEREO BUS CASCADE This selects whether the digital device connected to the DIGITAL STEREO IN jack will be cascaded with the stereo bus of the AW4416. the button display will change to “ENABLE. If “VARI” is selected. D VARI (vari-pitch) If “INT” is selected as the clock source.97%– +6. For example if you are synchronized to a 48 kHz external clock and record on a 44.” If another clock source is selected. and it will not be possible to set the button to “ENABLE. you can select whether the sampling frequency will be fixed (FIX button on) or variable (VARI button on). If “FIX” is selected. you can move the cursor to the knob at the right and rotate the [DATA/ JOG] dial to make fine adjustments to the sampling frequency over a range of –5.” and the input signal from the DIGITAL STEREO IN jack will be sent directly to the stereo bus of the AW4416. you must check that the sampling frequency of the song matches the frequency of the external clock.1 kHz song. knob to adjust the level (attenuation) of the input signal.

*1. the tabs displayed at the bottom of the screen are divided into two groups.1 kHz sampling frequency 48 kHz sampling frequency Unknown sampling frequency No signal being input. or invalid signal being input G EMPHASIS This shows whether the input signal has been processed by emphasis. Display 44. 1 [Key operation] • [SETUP] key ¡ [F5] (Monitor) key (*1) • Repeatedly press the [SETUP] key until the screen shown at the right appears. If the Monitor tab is not assigned to the [F5] key when you press the [SETUP] key.1k 48k None UNLOCK Meaning 44. In the SET UP screen. G Fs This shows the sampling frequency of the input signal. Display ON OFF ??? Meaning Emphasis on Emphasis off Unknown 22 — Reference Guide . 2 [Mouse operation] M button ¡ SETU button ¡ Monitor tab [Screen functions] A CHANNEL STATUS MONITOR This area monitors the state of the digital input signals from the DIGITAL STEREO IN jack (DIGITAL ST IN) or from a digital I/O card installed in an OPTION I/O slot (OPTION INPUTS).SET UP screen Monitor page Monitor the digital input signals [Function] Monitor the state of the digital audio signals being input from the DIGITAL STEREO IN jack or from digital I/O cards installed in the OPTION I/O slots. The following items are displayed. press the [SHIFT] key + [F1] (CHANGE TAB) key to switch the tabs.

). • [F1] (CHANGE TAB) key Switch between the two types of tab display..Broadcast Instrument AD Conv A/D Conv with (c) Solid Memory Experimental Unknown Meaning General use Optical laser device such as a CD player D/D converter or signal processor Digital broadcast Instrument or sound module A/D converter (without copyright data) A/D converter (with copyright data) Solid-state memory device Experimental device Unknown device F1 I Additional functions in the Monitor page In the Monitor page.. Display GEN LASER OPTICAL D/D Conv D. Display OK Prohibit Meaning Copying permitted Copying prohibited Tip! Digital input signals from the OPTION I/O slots are displayed in units of two adjacent odd-numbered ¡ even-numbered channels (channels 1/2.SET UP screen G CATEGORY This shows the category of the digital input signal. you can press the [SHIFT] key to assign the following function to the [F1] key. — Reference Guide 23 . B MONITOR SLOT These buttons select the OPTION I/O slot that will be monitored in the OPTION INPUTS area. G COPY This shows the copy permit/prohibit status of the digital input signal. The buttons in the MONITOR SLOT area (2) select whether slot 1 or 2 will be displayed. 3/4 .

24 — Reference Guide . [Mouse operation] M button ¡ SETU button ¡ Dither Out tab [Screen functions] A ON/OFF (dithering on/off) Turn dithering on/off for the DIGITAL STEREO OUT jack (DIGITAL OUT) or the output channels of the OPTION I/O slots (OPTION OUT SLOT). 1 2 [Key operation] • [SETUP] key ¡ [F1] (Dither Out) key (*1) • Repeatedly press the [SETUP] key until the screen shown at the right appears. you can press the [SHIFT] key to assign the following function to the [F1] key. *1. F1 • [F1] (CHANGE TAB) key Switch between the two types of tab display. • For digital I/O cards. 3/4. dithering is switched on/off by pairs of adjacent odd-numbered ¡ even-numbered channels (channels 1/2. . Tip! • Dithering is a process by which a small amount of noise is added to the signal in order to make the sound smoother. If the Dither Out tab is not assigned to the [F1] key when you press the [SETUP] key. Set this to the word length of the destination device. press the [SHIFT] key + [F1] (CHANGE TAB) key to switch the tabs. B WORD LENGTH (BIT) Select the word length (number of bits) for the signals that are output to the DIGITAL STEREO OUT jack (DIGITAL OUT) or to digital I/O cards installed in the OPTION I/O slots (OPTION OUT SLOT).. the tabs displayed at the bottom of the screen are divided into two groups.SET UP screen Dither Out page Specify dithering and word length of the digital outputs [Function] Turn dithering on/off and specify the word length of the output signal for the various digital outputs.. preventing the obtrusive sound that can occur if bits are discarded when digital audio data is transmitted from a high-resolution system to a lower resolution system (for example when copying from a 24 bit system to a 16 bit system). I Additional functions in the Dither Out page In the Dither Out page.). In the SET UP screen.

this indicates the tracks for which you can specify dithering and word length. In the SET UP screen. I Additional functions in the Dither TRK page In the Dither TRK page. the tabs displayed at the bottom of the screen are divided into two groups. — Reference Guide 25 . 3/4 . 1 [Mouse operation] M button ¡ SETUP button ¡ Dither TRK tab [Screen functions] A REC TRACK In pairs of adjacent odd-numbered ¡ evennumbered tracks (tracks 1/2. If the Dither TRK tab is not assigned to the [F1] key when you press the [SETUP] key. *1. • [F1] (CHANGE TAB) key Switch between the two types of tab display. B ON/OFF (dithering on/off) Turn dithering on/off for the data that is recorded on adjacent odd-numbered ¡ evennumbered tracks. The settings for the stereo track are common to tracks 1/2. F1 C WORD LENGTH (BIT) Select the word length (number of bits) for the data that is recorded on adjacent odd-numbered ¡ even-numbered tracks.SET UP screen Dither TRK page Specify dithering and word length for tracks [Function] Turn dithering on/off and specify the word length for recording on tracks 1–16 of the recorder.. Set this to match the quantization (number of bits) that you selected when creating the song. press the [SHIFT] key + [F1] (CHANGE TAB) key to switch the tabs. you can press the [SHIFT] key to assign the following function to the [F1] key. 2 3 [Key operation] • [SETUP] key ¡ [F2] (Dither TRK) key (*1) • Repeatedly press the [SETUP] key until the screen shown at the right appears.)..

press the [SHIFT] key + [F1] (CHANGE TAB) key to switch the tabs.SET UP screen Solo Setup page Make solo settings [Function] Make various settings related to the Solo function. or channels whose [ON] key is off. B LISTEN When RECORDING SOLO is selected for 1. 1 2 3 4 [Key operation] • [SETUP] key ¡ [F3] (Solo Setup) key (*1) • Repeatedly press the [SETUP] key until the screen shown at the right appears. 5 [Mouse operation] M button ¡ SETU button ¡ Solo Setup tab [Screen functions] A STATUS Turn on one of the following two buttons to select the operating mode of the Solo function. G PRE FADER The pre-fader signal will be sent to the SOLO bus. *1. the signal being monitored from the MONITOR OUT jacks/PHONES jack will be monaural. G AFTER FADER The signal after passing through fader and pan will be sent to the SOLO bus. When the Solo function is turned on. If the Solo Setup tab is not assigned to the [F3] key when you press the [SETUP] key. The pan and fader settings of each channel will affect the signal that is monitored by the MONITOR OUT jacks/ PHONES jack. 26 — Reference Guide . G MIXDOWN SOLO If this button is on. you can select one of the following two locations from which the signal will be sent from each channel to the SOLO bus. the tabs displayed at the bottom of the screen are divided into two groups. G RECORDING SOLO If this button is on. C SEL MODE (select mode) Select one of the following two ways by which the monitored signal will be selected when the Solo function is on. only the channel(s) being soloed will be sent to the stereo bus. In the SET UP screen. the solo signal will be output via the dedicated SOLO bus to the MONITOR OUT jacks/PHONES jack.) You can also monitor channels that are not assigned to the stereo bus or to buses 1–8. Since the pan setting of the channel will have no effect. (The output of the stereo bus and buses 1–8 will not be affected. It is not possible to monitor channels that are not assigned to the stereo bus. and the remaining channels will be muted. the solo signal will be output via the stereo bus to the MONITOR OUT jacks/ PHONES jack.

I Additional functions in the Solo Setup page In the Solo Setup page. you can press the [SHIFT] key to assign the following function to the [F1] key. all channels selected by pressing their [ON] keys will be monitored. Channels that are turned on in this area will not be affected when you press the [SOLO] key. only the channel last-selected by pressing its [ON] key will be monitored. E SOLO SAFE CHANNEL This area selects the channels that will be excluded from the Solo function when MIXDOWN SOLO is selected for 1. — Reference Guide 27 . F1 • [F1] (CHANGE TAB) key Switch between the two types of tab display. G MIX SOLO When the Solo function is on.SET UP screen G LAST SOLO When the Solo function is on. D LEVEL This adjusts the level of the signal that is sent to the SOLO bus when RECORDING SOLO mode is selected for 1.

.FILE screen Backup page Backup a song [Function] Backup song data from the internal hard disk to a SCSI device (e... [Key operation] • [FILE] key ¡ [F1] (Backup) key • Repeatedly press the [FILE] key until the screen shown at the right appears..... all songs will be selected for backup... The current song is highlighted in the list. Song name • SAVED AT .. and songs selected for backup are indicated by a “G” symbol in the BACKUP column. and cannot be modified.... Song protect on/off setting C ALL ENABLE button If you move the cursor to this button and press the [ENTER] key.. Data size of the song • BIT/FS... Date and time at which the song was last saved • SIZE . Quantization (word length)/ sampling frequency of the song • PRT ......... Move the cursor to this button and press the [ENTER] key to switch between ENABLE and DISABLE... The following information is also shown in the list.... F DESTINATION This selects the SCSI ID number of the backup destination drive..g.. 1 2 5 3 4 6 7 [Mouse operation] M button ¡ FILE button ¡ Backup tab [Screen functions] A Song list This list shows the songs saved on the internal hard disk....... D ALL DISABLE button If you move the cursor to this button and press the [ENTER] key.... This item is for display only. B BACKUP SONG button This button selects whether the song currently selected in the song list 1 will be included in the backup (ENABLE) or excluded from the backup (DISABLE)... E SOURCE This shows the backup source drive (internal hard disk).. all songs will be excluded from the backup. • SONG NAME . internal CD-RW drive or external MO drive)... 28 — Reference Guide ...........

The selection of either TYPE 1 or TYPE 2 is made in the UTILITY screen Prefer. • For details on the song backup procedure. Tip! • When backing up to removable media such as an MO drive. — Reference Guide 29 FILE . • [F2] (CD UNLOAD) key Eject the tray of the CD-RW drive.” I Additional functions in the Backup page In the Backup page you can press the [SHIFT] key to assign the following functions to the [F1]–[F2] keys. F1 F2 • [F1] (CD LOAD) key Close the open tray of the CD-RW drive.37). refer to Operation Guide “Chapter 16.FILE screen G EXECUTE button Execute the song backup. and “TYPE 2” in which data can be backed up in units of individual songs on one volume of media. Backing up and restoring songs.3 page (¡ P. you can select from two types of backup: “TYPE 1” in which the backup can extend across multiple volumes of media.

Do this before you execute Restore.. • [F2] (CD UNLOAD) key Eject the tray of the CD-RW drive. Backing up and restoring songs. Song name • SAVED AT .. Date and time at which the song was last saved on the AW4416’s internal hard disk • SIZE . set the TYPE setting to the format that you used when backing up. go to the UTILITY screen Prefer...... refer to Operation Guide “Chapter 16.. all songs will be excluded from the restore.. If a removable media drive (e. Tip! For details on song restore. Song protect on/off setting F DESTINATION This shows the restore destination drive (internal hard disk)...g... C ALL ENABLE button If you move the cursor to this button and press the [ENTER] key... all songs will be selected for restore... Quantization (word length)/ sampling frequency of the song • PRT . I Additional functions in the Restore page In the Restore page you can press the [SHIFT] key to assign the following functions to the [F1]–[F3] keys. This item is for display only. G EXECUTE button Execute the song restore. and in the REMOVABLE BACKUP area.. 1 [Key operation] • [FILE] key ¡ [F2] (Restore) key • Repeatedly press the [FILE] key until the screen shown at the right appears.. Move the cursor to this button and press the [ENTER] key to switch between ENABLE and DISABLE.... Data size of the song • BIT/FS ........ 2 5 3 4 6 7 [Mouse operation] M button ¡ FILE button ¡ Restore tab [Screen functions] A Song list This list shows the songs saved on the backup destination SCSI device.........” B RESTORE SONG button This button selects whether the song currently selected in the song list 1 will be included in the restore (ENABLE) or excluded from the restore (DISABLE). • [F3] (RELOAD) key Reload the removable media and update the displayed list.. and cannot be modified. Songs selected for restore are indicated by a “G” symbol in the RESTORE column. MO) is selected... E SOURCE This selects the ID number of the SCSI device on which the data was backed up. 30 — Reference Guide . F1 F2 F3 D ALL DISABLE button If you move the cursor to this button and press the [ENTER] key.. The following information is also shown in the list.... • SONG NAME . • [F1] (CD LOAD) key Close the open tray of the CD-RW drive...3 page.........FILE screen Restore page Restore backed-up songs [Function] Restore songs from the backup destination SCSI device to the AW4416’s internal hard disk...

all the saved data will be lost forever.IDE. Please use caution.FILE screen Disk Util. or erase CD-RW media. page Format or erase a disk [Function] Format the internal hard disk or an external SCSI device. select “INT. refer to Operation Guide “Chapter 16. MO) is selected. and therefore the FORMAT item for selecting the format method will not be displayed. FORMAT column will appear before the Format operation is executed. However if REMOVABLE BACKUP is set to “TYPE 1” in the UTILITY screen Prefer.g.” The display will change as follows. To format the internal hard disk. tab [Screen functions] A Drive select Select the SCSI ID number of the drive that you wish to format (external SCSI device such as MO) or of the CD-RW drive in which you wish to erase CD-RW media. Tip! • If a removable media drive (e. 1 [Mouse operation] M button ¡ FILE button ¡ Disk Util.. • For details on this procedure. the media will be formatted automatically. allowing you to select the file system that will be used for formatting and the formatting method. Backing up and restoring songs. [Key operation] • [FILE] key ¡ [F3] (Disk Util. — Reference Guide 31 .3 page.) key • Repeatedly press the [FILE] key until the screen shown at the right appears. 2 B EXECUTE button Execute formatting of the selected drive/media.” I If the internal hard disk or an external SCSI device (MO or external hard disk) is selected When you execute the Format operation. depending on the type of drive that you select here.

E CD-RW MEDIA ERASE Use the following two buttons to specify how the CD-RW media will be erased. lower the read speed and try again. Tip! For details on erasing CD-RW media. 5 3 4 • [F1] (CD LOAD) key Close the open tray of the CD-RW drive. double speed.. quad speed or 8x speed).... Only the TOC (Table Of Contents) of the CD-RW media will be erased.. F1 F2 • [F2] (CD UNLOAD) key C AUDIO READ SPEED Use the x1.. all data on the CD-RW media will be lost forever.” When you execute the Erase operation. D WRITE SPEED Use the x1. • PERFECT . Backing up and restoring songs.. quad speed or 6x speed)... 32 — Reference Guide .. If errors occur during CD-IMPORT. x4.. x2.. Please use caution... or x6 buttons to select the writing speed (normal speed. x2. Eject the tray of the CD-RW drive.FILE screen I If an internal or external CD-RW drive is selected I Additional functions in the Disk Util. • SIMPLE . refer to Operation Guide “Chapter 16. All data on the CD-RW media will be erased. page In the Disk Util. double speed. page you can press the [SHIFT] key to assign the following functions to the [F1]– [F2] keys.. x4. This setting is valid only for CD-IMPORT... Tip! Normally you should set the read and write speeds to the fastest speeds supported by your CD-RW drive. or x8 buttons to select the reading speed (normal speed....

1 kHz sine wave • SINE 10 kHz button .. 2 3 4 5 [Mouse operation] M button ¡ UTIL button ¡ Oscillator tab [Screen functions] A Level meter This shows the oscillator output level that is being sent to buses 1–8 and AUX buses 1–8.. Stereo bus B OSC ON (oscillator on) button This button switches the oscillator on/off. You can specify more than one bus as the oscillator output destination. White noise — Reference Guide 33 UTILITY . Use caution...... C LEVEL knob This knob adjusts the output level (–96 dB– 0 dB) of the oscillator..... AUX buses 1–8 • ST BUS button ... • BUS 1–8 buttons . and send it to the desired bus...... E BUS ASSIGN Use the following buttons to specify the bus to which the oscillator signal will be sent.......... since they may damage your speakers if played back at a high volume..... (Default=OFF) Tip! Sine waves and white noise have a higher sound pressure level than they appear to your ears.....UTILITY screen Oscillator page Using the test tone oscillator [Function] Select the waveform of the test tone oscillator built into the AW4416... 1 [Key operation] • [UTILITY] key ¡ [F1] (Oscillator) key • Repeatedly press the [UTILITY] key until the screen shown at the right appears. • SINE 100 Hz button .. Buses 1–8 • AUX 1–8 buttons .......... 10 kHz sine wave • NOISE .... 100 Hz sine wave • SINE 1 kHz button . D WAVEFORM Use the following four buttons to select the waveform of the test tone oscillator....................

1) key • Repeatedly press the [UTILITY] key until the screen shown at the right appears...1 tab [Screen functions] A AUTO EQ DISPLAY B AUTO PAN DISPLAY If the 1 or 2 buttons are ON. (Default=off) F DIGITAL ST IN SYNC CAUTION G OPTION IN SYNC CAUTION If the 6 or 7 buttons are ON.Pre-fader position • POST FADER button .. • PRE EQ button . the current EQ/pan settings will appear in the upper right of the display when you operate the [EQ]/[PAN] controls.. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 [Mouse operation] M button ¡ UTIL button ¡ Prefer....1 page Make overall settings for the AW4416 (1) [Function] Enable/disable warning messages. a popup window will ask you to confirm the operation when storing or recalling a scene or library. an error message will be displayed if a digital signal that cannot be synchronized with the word clock source is input from the DIGITAL STEREO IN jack or from an optional I/O card........... [Key operation] • [UTILITY] key ¡ [F2] (Prefer. and specify the point from which direct output will be taken. (Default=on) Tip! If buttons 1/2 are off... C STORE CONFIRMATION D RECALL CONFIRMATION If the 3 or 4 buttons are ON. (Default=on) E DIRECT OUT EXTRACT POSITION Use the following three buttons to select the position from which the signal will be taken for direct output from input channels 1–24..UTILITY screen Prefer.Post-fader position (default) 34 — Reference Guide ..Immediately before the EQ • PRE FADER button ... operating the [EQ] controls or [PAN] control located at the right of the display will cause the corresponding page to automatically appear in the display..

[Key operation] • [UTILITY] key ¡ [F3] (Prefer.” (Default= 5 seconds) SCENE E FINE 2 INT EXT VARI 6 10 14 18 20 26 READY INPUT FINE 2 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 6 10 12 14 20 18 30 20 42 26 60 READY INPUT L R L R — Reference Guide 35 .TR Edit page. For details on rollback. • The value you specify here has no effect if “measure display” is selected as the counter display method.1k 48k LOCK MTC MASTER SLAVE –dB 0 C PREROLL/POSTROLL TIME Specify the pre-roll time (0–5 seconds) and post-roll time (0–5 seconds) used when you perform auto punch-in/out. G NORMAL The full range of the level meter will indicate levels of –60 dB–0 dB. Punch-in/out. page) or how you specify locate points using the [NUM LOCATE] key.1k 48k LOCK MTC MASTER SLAVE –dB 0 SCENE E • The value you specify here will not affect how you adjust locate points (TRACK screen Mark Adj. E –dB 0 S F ms WORD CLOCK 44. For details on pre-roll time and post-roll time.” (Default= 5 seconds) G FINE The full range of the level meter will indicate levels of –26 dB–0 dB.000) S D FL METER FINE Select one of the following two scales for the level meter/counter display. pre-roll/postroll time. 1 2 5 6 7 3 4 8 [Mouse operation] M button ¡ UTIL button ¡ Prefer. For example if the grid value is set to “00:00:00.010. and the nudge playback method etc. refer to Operation Guide “Chapter 6. Transport/ locate operations. INT EXT VARI FINE 2 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 6 10 12 14 20 18 30 20 42 26 60 READY INPUT L R 2 6 12 20 30 42 60 READY INPUT L R B ROLLBACK TIME This specifies the rollback time (0–5 seconds) of the [ROLL BACK] key.2) key • Repeatedly press the [UTILITY] key until the screen shown at the right appears. refer to Operation Guide “Chapter 7. (Default= 00:00:00.2 tab [Screen functions] A GRID This sets the minimum unit when you specify an area in the EDIT screen TR Edit page or V.UTILITY screen Prefer. This setting is convenient when you wish to make fine adjustments to the level near the 0 dB region. (Default setting) E –dB 0 F ms WORD CLOCK 44.” the specified location will move in 10 millisecond increments for each click of the [DATA/JOG] dial.2 page Make overall settings for the AW4416 (2) [Function] Set the rollback time.

Transport/ locate operations. F TIME Specify the playback length (nudge time) of the Nudge function over a range of 25–800 milliseconds. (Default= AFTER) G AFTER Playback will be repeated for the specified nudge time 6 starting at the current location. the setting will alternate between ENABLE/DISABLE. G CD/DAT DIGITAL REC This setting specifies whether digital recording from an audio CD or DAT tape via a CD-RW drive or the DIGITAL STEREO IN jack will be allowed (ENABLE) or not (DISABLE). H DIGITAL OUT COPYRIGHT This setting specifies whether SCMS (Serial Copy Management System) copy protect data will be enabled (ENABLE) or not (DISABLE) for the digital signal output from the DIGITAL STEREO OUT jack.UTILITY screen E PLAY MODE Select one of the following two play modes for the Nudge function. it will not be possible to create a second-generation digital copy. the following two-page warning will be displayed. G BEFORE Playback will be repeated for the specified nudge time 6 ending at the current location. When you move the cursor to the “DISABLE” button and press the [ENTER] key. it will still be possible to make a digital recording from the DIGITAL STEREO OUT jack on a DAT recorder or MD recorder.” Even if copy protect data is enabled. If you select the YES button in the second page. 36 — Reference Guide . the button display will change to ENABLE. (Default= 100 milliseconds) Tip! For details on using the Nudge function. refer to Operation Guide “Chapter 6. When you move the cursor to this button and press the [ENTER] key. However.

Tip! • When you save a song. mouse cursor speed. this will indicate “OK. If this method is selected. month (M). this will indicate “LOW. SCSI TERMINATOR (internal SCSI terminator) This switches the internal SCSI bus terminator on/off. “Important points you must observe. (Default= TYPE 1) G TYPE 1 This backup method makes full use of the capacity of the removable media. the date and time you input will be cancelled.3 tab [Screen functions] A CLOCK Here you can set the internal clock of the AW4416. date (D). C INT. the internal clock of the AW4416 is set to Japan time.3) key • Repeatedly press the [UTILITY] key until the screen shown at the right appears. the media will be formatted automatically before the backup begins. • When shipped from the factory. refer to the opening section of the Operation Guide. minute (m). refer to Operation Guide “Before you begin.UTILITY screen Prefer. B MOUSE SPEED Use buttons 1–4 to specify the movement speed of the mouse pointer. For details on the terminator setting.3 page Make overall settings for the AW4416 (3) [Function] Set the internal clock. [Key operation] • [UTILITY] key ¡ [F4] (Prefer. If you use the RESET button. and second (s) fields.” If the “LOW” indication appears. If the battery capacity is sufficient. hour (h).” E REMOVABLE BACKUP This specifies the backup method when backing up songs to removable media such as MO. but does not allow backup data to be added later. date and time information will be stored in the song according to this internal clock. • For details on setting the internal clock.” If the battery has run low and needs to be replaced. and use the SET button to finalize the date and time. Even if the data being backed up will not fit on a single volume of media. the backup can extend across multiple volumes of media.” (Default: on) — Reference Guide 37 . 1 4 2 3 5 6 7 [Mouse operation] M button ¡ UTIL button ¡ Prefer. Move the cursor to this button and press the [ENTER] key to switch the setting between the following two methods. D BATTERY This displays the state of the battery that operates the AW4416’s internal clock. Higher value will produce faster movement. and removable media backup method etc. Use the [DATA/JOG] dial to adjust the year (Y). please contact your dealer to have the battery replaced.

(Default= on) G CD BACKUP MODE Use the following three buttons to select the writing mode when backing up songs to CD-R/ RW media. G TEST/WRITE buttons These are the same functions as the MASTERING MODE 6 TEST/WRITE buttons. Tip! For details on the procedure for backing up songs. Backing up and restoring songs. 38 — Reference Guide . If for some reason the backup was not written correctly.” F MASTERING MODE Use the following two buttons to select the writing mode that will be used when you execute the Mastering function. an error message will be displayed when Compare is executed. G TEST button If this button is on. the backup source song data on the internal hard disk will be compared with the backup destination data on the CD-R/ RW media after the data has been written. refer to Operation Guide “Chapter 16. (Default= off) G WRITE button This turns data writing on/off. only the writing test will be executed. If the TEST button = on and the WRITE button = off. Before you can use this method to backup on previously-unused media. you must format the media manually. It is not possible to backup data that extends across multiple volumes of media. G COMPARE button When this button is on.UTILITY screen G TYPE 2 This backup method allows new backup data to be added to media on which data was previously backed up. a test will be performed before writing data to the CD-R/RW media to see whether writing errors will occur.

the program change assigned to a scene number will be transmitted when that scene is recalled. H MIDI OUT SEL. If you wish to transmit MIDI Clock to an external MIDI device. If this button is on. (MIDI OUT select) This selects whether the MIDI OUT connector will be used as MIDI OUT or as MIDI THRU. regardless of the Rx (receive channel) setting. received control changes will be re-transmitted without change from the MIDI OUT connector or TO HOST connector. F Tx CH (transmit channel) Select the channel (1–16) on which MIDI messages will be transmitted to external MIDI devices. 1 2 3 45 [Key operation] 7 8 9 MIDI • [MIDI] key ¡ [F1] (MIDI Setup) key • Repeatedly press the [MIDI] key until the screen shown at the right appears. receiving a program change will recall the scene assigned to that program number. 6 [Mouse operation] M button¡ MIDI button ¡ MIDI Setup tab [Screen functions] A PROGRAM CHANGE TX (program change transmission) Specify whether program changes will be transmitted to external MIDI devices. D PROGRAM CHANGE ECHO If this button is on. received program changes will be re-transmitted without change (“thrued”) from the MIDI OUT connector or TO HOST connector. B PROGRAM CHANGE RX (program change reception) Specify whether program changes will be received from external MIDI devices. E CONTROL CHANGE ECHO If this button is on.” For details on synchronization. — Reference Guide 39 . G Rx CH (receive channel) Select the channel (1–16) on which MIDI messages will be received from external MIDI devices. If “MIDI THRU” is selected. C PROGRAM CHANGE OMNI If this button is on.MIDI screen MIDI Setup page Make basic MIDI settings [Function] Set the MIDI transmit/receive channels.41. and specify the port used for transmission and reception. program changes of all MIDI channels will be received. operations performed on the AW4416 itself will not be output. you must set this to “MIDI OUT. If this button is on. refer to P. turn transmission/reception of various messages on/off.

25 kbps 38.25 kbps *1. set the clock to “1 MHz.” 40 — Reference Guide . OUT/THRU connectors TO HOST connector TO HOST connector Transmission speed 31.MIDI screen I PORT SELECT Select the port and transmission speed with which MIDI messages will be transmitted and received. On the software that you use.4 kbps 31. Only usable with Macintosh computers that have a modem/printer port. Setting MIDI TO HOST PC2 TO HOST MAC Computer platform MIDI compatible IBM PC compatible Apple Macintosh series (*1) Port type MIDI IN.

G MTC MIDI Time Code will be transmitted from the MTC OUT connector.39) B MTC SYNC Specify whether the AW4416 will be the MTC master (MASTER) or slave (SLAVE) when MTC is used to synchronize an AW4416 song with the operation of an external MIDI device. If slave is selected. 1 2 3 4 [Key operation] • [MIDI] key ¡ [F2] (MIDI Sync) key • Repeatedly press the [MIDI] key until the screen shown at the right appears.2). If master is selected. G MIDI CLOCK MIDI Clock will be transmitted from the MIDI OUT connector or TO HOST connector. Tip! The MTC frame rate is selected in the SONG screen Setting page (¡ P. this setting specifies whether the AW4416 will be the MMC master (MASTER) or slave (SLAVE). the AW4416 song will follow the MTC messages received at the MIDI IN connector. If slave is selected. you must set MIDI OUT SEL. C MMC (MIDI Machine Control) When using MMC for remote control between the AW4416 and an external MIDI device. If master is selected. G OFF Synchronization signals will not be output. operating the transport of the AW4416 will cause the corresponding MMC command to be transmitted from the MIDI OUT connector or TO HOST connector. to “MIDI OUT” in the MIDI screen MIDI Setup page. MTC messages will be transmitted from the MTC OUT connector in synchronization with the progress of the song. MMC commands sent from a MIDI sequencer or other external device can be used to remotely select or de-select recording tracks and control transport operations on the AW4416. [Mouse operation] M button ¡ MIDI button ¡ MIDI Sync tab 5 6 [Screen functions] A SYNC OUT Select one of the following synchronization signals for output.MIDI screen MIDI Sync page Make settings related to MIDI synchronization [Function] Make various settings for synchronization operation. — Reference Guide 41 . G MTC + MIDI CLK Both MIDI Time Code (MTC OUT connector) and MIDI Clock (MIDI OUT connector or TO HOST connector) will be transmitted. (¡ P. When using the AW4416 as the MIDI Clock master.

For details on setting the device ID. (MIDI Machine Control device) When using MMC for remote control.00 Sync offset= –01:00:00:00.00”. You can specify a range of “– 24:00:00:00.MIDI screen When using MMC. this parameter specifies how the absolute time of the AW4416 will be shifted relative to the time code (MTC) received from the external device. this parameter specifies the precision with which MTC will be received. try the 1 or 2 setting. you must match the device ID of the AW4416 and the external MIDI device.00 Received time code 00:00:00:00. 42 — Reference Guide .00 Received time code 00:30 30:00:00.00”–”+24:00:00:00.6. refer to MMC DEV.00 Received time code 23:00:00:00. Sync offset= 00:00:00:00.00 Song 00:35:00:00. F MMC DEV. If you want the MTC transmitted from the MTC OUT connector to be shifted relative to the absolute time of the AW4416.00 Tip! The offset value you specify here does not affect the MTC that is transmitted from the MTC OUT connector of the AW4416. specify a device ID of 1–127 to distinguish each device.00 Sync offset= +00:30:00:00. D SYNC AVE.00 Song 23:05:00:00. you must adjust the Time Code Top (SONG screen Setting page).00 Song 00:00:05:00. E SYNC OFFSET When the AW4416 is used as an MTC slave. Normally you will use this with the “OFF” button selected. (sync average) When the AW4416 is used as an MTC slave. However if synchronization is unreliable.

and rotate the [DATA/JOG] dial to select the scene number. the scene number assignments will be reset to the following default settings. TITLE (scene memory title) The scene name of each scene is displayed. G Program change numbers 1–96 Scenes 1–96 G Program change numbers 97–99/101–128 No assignment G Program change number 100 Initial data (default scene) — Reference Guide 43 . [Mouse operation] M button ¡ MIDI button ¡ PGM Asgn. D INITIALIZE If you move the cursor to this button and press the [ENTER] key. Scene numbers in which nothing has been stored will be displayed as “No Data!”. B SCENE MEM. C SCENE MEM. (program change number) These are the program change numbers 1–128. page Assign a scene number to each program change number [Function] Assign a scene number to each program change number 1–128. tab 4 1 2 3 [Screen functions] A PGM CHG.MIDI screen PGM Asgn. (scene memory number) This is the scene number assigned to each program number.) key • Repeatedly press the [MIDI] key until the screen shown at the right appears. No. Move the cursor to this area. and rotate the [DATA/JOG] dial to select the program number. [Key operation] • [MIDI] key ¡ [F3] (PGM Asgn. No. Move the cursor to this area.

E DELAY Turn the delay on/off. (attenuation) Set the attenuation value.VIEW screen CH View page View all parameters of a channel [Function] This page displays all mix parameters of the selected channel. Parameters other than EQ and dynamics can also be edited in this page. 44 — Reference Guide . C EQ (equalizer) Turn the EQ on/off. G Input channel/monitor channel 1 2 6 7 89 J [Key operation] • [VIEW] key ¡ [F1] (CH View) key • Repeatedly press the [VIEW] key until the screen shown at the right appears. F ROUT (routing) Assign the channel to buses 1– 8 and the stereo bus. G Paired input channels/monitor channels 1 2 6 7 89 J B PHASE Switch between normal (N) and reverse (R) phase. 3 4 5 K L M N O [Mouse operation] M button ¡ VIEW button ¡ CH View tab [Screen functions] A ATT. This area also displays a graph showing the approximate response of the current EQ settings. This area also displays a graph showing the approximate response of the current dynamics processor settings. 3 4 5 K L M N O D DYNAMICS Turn the dynamics processor on/off. The delay time can also be edited here.

and the output level of the stereo output channel. I Mute group This area shows the mute group to which the channel belongs. the knob will move to the center position. you must set either EFF1 or EFF2 to “INSERT” in the SETUP screen Patch IN page.EFF 2 button When this button is on.EFF 1 button When this button is on. If neither of the effects is set to “INSERT. internal effect 2 will be inserted into the corresponding channel. internal effect 1 will be inserted into the corresponding channel. You can also defeat or register groups in this page. G OFF button When this button is on. 3 L 4 M O L ASSIGN button Use this button to insert an external effect or internal effect into the channel. K Pair This shows the pairing status.” attempting to turn on the INT. You can also defeat or register groups in this page. an effect will not be inserted. When inserting the internal effect 1/2 into a channel.EFF1/INT. Pairing can also be set/defeated in this page. G INT. G Return channel 1 2 6 7 J Tip! If you move the cursor to the PAN knob and press the [ENTER] key. G INT. — Reference Guide 45 . EFF NOW SELECTED AUX. you can select the desired input and output jacks for use as the insert send/return jacks for the corresponding channel.” G EXTERNAL button When this button is on.EFF2 button in this screen will produce an error message of “ERROR INT.VIEW screen G PAN Adjust the panning between the L/ R channels of the stereo bus or between odd-numbered ¡ evennumbered buses. 3 L M 5 N O H Fader group This area shows the fader group to which the channel belongs. or return channel. Move the cursor to this button and press the [ENTER] key to access a screen like the following. monitor channel. G Stereo output channel 1 7 J VIEW J Input/output meter This shows the input level of the input channel.

. The heart symbol indicates AUX buses that are paired...VIEW screen G SEND When the EXTERNAL button is on..L/R channels of the DIGITAL STEREO OUT jack • STOUT L/R .OMNI OUT 1–4 jacks • SL1-1–SL1-8........... M Fader This shows the current fader location both graphically and numerically.. O ON/OFF This switches the channel on/off..L/R channels of the DIGITAL STEREO IN jack F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 • [F1] (EQ ON/OFF) keys Switch EQ on/off...” • For the procedure of inserting an internal effect into a channel.... Patching. G RTN. • For the procedure of inserting an external effect into a channel. refer to Operation Guide “Chapter 8.. • [F2] (DYN ON/OFF) key Switch the dynamics processor on/off..... Tip! • When the INT. Internal effects... the input and output of internal effect 1/ 2 will automatically be assigned to the insert send/return of that channel.. This assignment cannot be changed. • [F3] (ROUT OFF) key Turn off all signals sent from that channel to AUX buses 1–8.Input channels 1–8 of OPTION I/O slot 2 • D STIN L/R ... • AD1–AD8 .Output channels 1–8 of OPTION I/O slot 1 • SL2-1–SL2-8.... refer to Operation Guide “Chapter 10...... and only the R channel can be selected for even-numbered channels..L/R channels of the STEREO OUT jack N AUX This shows the send level and pre/post selection for AUX buses 1–8.... • OMNI 1–4 .. • [F4] (PAN CENTER) key Set the pan to center. Tip! If you select D STO or STOUT. You can also move the cursor to the fader and rotate the [DATA/JOG] dial to modify the fader setting.....” • [F5] (EFF.... move the cursor to this area and rotate the [DATA/JOG] dial to select one of the following jacks for use as the insert send jack.. These settings can also be edited in this page... This is the same function as the ON/OFF button of 4 DYNAMICS. only the L channel can be selected for odd-numbered channels.Input channels 1–8 of OPTION I/O slot 1 • SL2-1–SL2-8....... The setting can also be edited in this page. move the cursor to this area and rotate the [DATA/JOG] dial to select one of the following jacks for use as the insert return jack... INS ASGN) key This button is used to insert an external effect or internal effect into a channel.. I Additional functions in the CH View page In the CH View page you can press the [SHIFT] key to assign the following additional functions to the [F1]–[F5] keys.... This is the same function as the ON/OFF button of 3 EQ. 46 — Reference Guide . When the EXTERNAL button is on.EFF 1 or INT..EFF 2 button is on.. This is the same function as the L ASSIGN button.Output channels 1–8 of OPTION I/O slot 2 • D STO L/R .....INPUT 1–8 jacks • SL1-1–SL1-8.

and recall will not be possible./DELAY settings This area shows the EQ/dynamics processor/ delay settings for the channel. Library numbers 0 and 1 are recall-only preset programs. For preset numbers 0/1 this is displayed as “GENERAL. C Input meter This meter shows the input level of the channel.VIEW screen Library page Store or recall channel settings [Function] Store the settings of the currently selected channel into the channel library. Move the cursor to the TITLE EDIT button and press the [ENTER] key to access the TITLE EDIT popup window where you can input the name. H LIBRARY TITLE This shows the name assigned to the library. or recall stored settings. E RECALL button Recall the currently selected settings from the list.” — Reference Guide 47 . (library number) This shows the library number 1–64. F STORE button Store the current channel settings. J SOURCE CHANNEL This shows the original channel from which the settings were stored. an error message of “ERROR NO DATA TO RECALL” will be displayed. and their names cannot be edited. data cannot be stored in them. refer to page 60 of the Operation Guide. For details on inputting text. Library numbers 0 and 1 are recall-only preset programs. Also. If you select a number in which nothing has been stored and attempt to recall it. G LIBRARY No. Data can be stored only in library numbers 2–64. B EQ/DYN. I ROM This write-prohibit symbol is displayed for recall-only numbers 0/1. 1 [Mouse operation] M button ¡ VIEW button ¡ Library tab 4 5 6 7 8 9 J [Screen functions] A Channel This indicates the currently selected channel. numbers in which channel settings have not been stored will be displayed as “No Data!.” and their title cannot be edited. 2 3 [Key operation] • [VIEW] key ¡ [F2] (Library) key • Repeatedly press the [VIEW] key until the screen shown at the right appears. D TITLE EDIT button Use this to edit the name (library title) of the settings stored in the channel library.

the pan setting of the L channel will be recalled. • If you recall a stereo channel to a mono channel. To do so. • [F2] (RECALL) key Recall the currently selected channel settings from the list. the channel settings that had previously been stored in that number will be lost. Use the [DATA/JOG] dial to select the library number that you wish to recall. 3. Move the cursor to the RECALL button and press the [ENTER] key. Move the cursor to the OK button and press the [ENTER] key. This is the same function as the 5 RECALL button. Select the channel whose settings you wish to store. Input the library title. The Recall operation will be executed. • If you select a number in which nothing has been stored and attempt to recall. 2. Select the channel into which you wish to recall the settings. 48 — Reference Guide . Move the cursor to the STORE button and press the [ENTER] key. Tip! It is possible to store the settings directly without accessing the TITLE EDIT popup window. To do so. The following message will ask you for confirmation. F1 F2 F3 • [F1] (TITLE EDIT) key Use this to edit the name (library title) of the settings saved in the channel library. and access the VIEW screen Library page.VIEW screen I Additional functions in the Library page In the Library page you can press the [SHIFT] key to assign the following functions to the [F1]–[F3] keys. turn STORE CONFIRMATION off in the UTILITY screen Prefer. and the Recall will not be performed. G To store channel settings in the library [Procedure] 1.1 page ([UTILITY] key ¡ [F2] key). The TITLE EDIT popup window will appear. an error message of “ERROR NO DATA TO RECALL” will be displayed. • [F3] (STORE) key Store the current channel settings. access the UTILITY screen Prefer. When you execute the Store operation. Use the [DATA/JOG] dial to select the library number in which you wish to store the settings. 3. 4. 2. Tip! It is possible to recall the library settings without seeing the CONFIRMATION popup window. and access the VIEW screen Library page. This is the same function as the 6 STORE button. For details on inputting characters. 4. Tip! When you recall to a paired channel. The settings will be stored. 5. G To recall channel settings from the library 1. This is the same function as the 4 TITLE EDIT button.1 page ([UTILITY] key ¡ [F2] key) and turn the RECALL CONFIRMATION setting off. Move the cursor to the OK button and press the [ENTER] key. refer to Operation Guide page 60. allowing you to input a name. the same settings will be recalled to both channels.

PAN/ROUTE screen Pan 1–16/Pan17–24/Pan MONI pages Set pan and routing [Function] Set pan and routing for the input channels. 1 2 3 4 5 PAN/ ROUTE [Mouse operation] M button ¡ PAN button ¡ Pan 1– 16 tab/Pan 17–24 tab/Pan MONI tab G Pan 17–24 1 2 3 4 5 — Reference Guide 49 . G Pan 1–16 [Key operation] • [PAN] key ¡ [F1] key (Pan 1– 16)/[F2] key (Pan 17–24)/[F3] key (Pan MONI) • Repeatedly press the [PAN] key until one of the screens shown at the right appear. and set the balance of the stereo output channel. return channels and monitor channels.

B Bus assign buttons 1–8 These buttons assign the signal of each channel to buses 1–8.In the PAN 1–16/PAN 17–24/PAN MONI pages. Pressing the [ENTER] key will set the knob to the CENTER position. In the PAN 1–16/PAN 17–24/PAN MONI pages. 50 — Reference Guide . G INDIVIDUAL button The pan of each channel will operate independently.1 page ([UTILITY] key ¡ [F2] key). (2). the channel can be specified freely.PAN/ROUTE screen G Pan MONI 1 2 3 4 5 [Screen functions] A Channel This indicates the channel for which pan/routing is being set. G INVERTED GANG button The pan of paired channels will be linked inversely. E MODE Use the following three buttons to select how the PAN knob will function for paired channels. If AUTO PAN DISPLAY is turned “ON” in the UTILITY screen Prefer. For this reason. (Default setting) G GANG button The pan of paired channels will be linked while preserving the existing spatial relationship. move the cursor to the PAN knob of the desired channel and rotate the [DATA/JOG] dial. C ST (stereo bus assign) buttons These buttons assign the signal of each channel to the stereo bus. and rotate the [PAN] control. On the AW4416. operating the [PAN] control will automatically switch the display to the PAN/ROUTE screen even if a screen other than the PAN/ROUTE screen had been displayed. The ST OUT knobs in the Pan 17–24 page adjust the output channel balance. Use the [DATA/JOG] dial to operate the knobs. D PAN knobs These knobs pan the signal between L/R of the stereo bus and between odd-numbered and even-numbered buses. (1).Use the [SEL] keys to select the desired channel. regardless of the state of the [SEL] keys. there may be cases in which the channel whose pan is adjusted by the [PAN] control is different than the channel whose pan is adjusted by the [DATA/JOG] dial. the pan of a channel can be adjusted in the following two ways.

In the PAN screen. F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 • [F1] (INDIVIDUAL) key Independently control the pan of paired channels. — Reference Guide 51 . • [F3] (INVERTED GANG) key Inversely link the pan of paired channels. • [F2] (GANG) key Link the pan of paired channels while maintaining their existing spatial relationship. • [F4] (ALL ROUT OFF) key Turn off bus assign 1–8 buttons for all channels in the page. move the cursor to the OK button and press the [ENTER] key. To execute the copy. you can press the [SHIFT] key to assign the following additional functions to the [F1]–[F5] keys. • [F5] (COPY PAN TO ALL) key Copy the pan setting of the currently selected channel to all channels (including the channels of other pages). 2. The CONFIRMATION popup window will appear. G Copying pan settings to all channels [Procedure] 1. Press the [SHIFT] key + [F5] key. and the copy will not occur. asking you to confirm the copy. This is the same function as the INDIVIDUAL button. 3. This is the same function as the GANG button. a message of “Can’t Copy This Parameter” will appear. move the cursor to the PAN knob of the copy source channel. This is the same function as the INVERTED GANG button.PAN/ROUTE screen I Additional functions in the Pan page In the Pan 1–16/Pan 17–24/Pan MONI pages. If the cursor is at a parameter other than the PAN knob.

The heart symbol will be connected for channels/buses that are paired. and the button will be displayed as “MONO x2. However.” 52 — Reference Guide .” The heart symbol will be divided for channels/ buses that are not paired. Tip! • All parameters other than phase and pan will be linked for channels that are paired. It will not be linked if the pan mode is set to INDIVIDUAL (the default setting). • For buses that are paired.PAN/ROUTE screen Pair CH/Pair BUS pages Set channel/bus pairing [Function] Set or defeat pairing of buses 1/2–7/8 and AUX 1/2–5/6 for adjacent odd-numbered ¡ even-numbered channels. • For AUX buses that are paired. the master level (HOME screen/Bus page) and the send level of the signals sent from each channel to the corresponding AUX bus will be linked. the master level (HOME screen/Bus page) will be linked. 1 [Mouse operation] M button ¡ PAN button ¡ Pair CH tab/ Pair BUS tab 2 G Pair BUS 1 2 [Screen functions] A Channel/bus These are the channels/bus for which pairing will be set or defeated. and the button will be displayed as “STEREO. B Pairing These buttons set or defeat pairing. pan will be linked if the pan mode is set to GANG or INVERTED GANG. G Pair CH [Key operation] • [PAN] key ¡ [F4] key (Pair CH)/[F5] (Pair BUS) • Repeatedly press the [PAN] key until one of the screens shown at the right appears.

A popup window will appear. 3. 2. move the cursor in the Pair CH page/Pair Bus page to a button that is displayed as “MONO x 2. move the cursor to a button displayed as “STEREO” and press the [ENTER] key. You can select one of the following three pairing methods.” When you use the [SEL] keys to select a paired channel.PAN/ROUTE screen G Setting or defeating pairing for channels/buses [Procedure] 1. G INPUT y ¡ x (x=odd number.” and press the [ENTER] key. the other [SEL] key will blink. G RESET BOTH The parameters of both odd and even-numbered channels/buses will be reset to their default values. and press the [ENTER] key. To pair channels or buses. Tip! Another way to pair channels is to simultaneously press adjacent odd-numbered ¡ even-numbered [SEL] keys. Move the cursor to either the “INPUT 1 ¡ 2. y=even number) The parameters of the odd-numbered channel/ bus (except for phase and pan) will be copied to the even-numbered channel. allowing you to specify how the pairing will occur. — Reference Guide 53 . The PAIRING popup window will appear. To defeat pairing.” or “RESET BOTH” button.” “INPUT 2 ¡ 1. 4. Move the cursor to the OK button and press the [ENTER] key. In this case. G INPUT x ¡ y (x=odd number. Tip! You can also defeat channel pairing by pressing the two [SEL] keys simultaneously. y=even number) The parameters of the even-numbered channel/ bus (except for phase and pan) will be copied to the odd-numbered channel. the above window will appear when you press the two [SEL] keys simultaneously. the button display will change to “STEREO. asking you to confirm that you wish to defeat pairing. When you execute pairing.

this knob switches them on/off. For the LOW band EQ. turning the Q knob all the way in the clockwise direction will switch the EQ type to L. This is used mainly to prevent clipping when the EQ is boosted. ON/OFF (LOW/HIGH bands only) D Output meter This meter shows the post-EQ output level. Higher settings will produce a steeper curve.SHELF (LOW band only). Range: –96 dB–0 dB F F (frequency) knob Set the center frequency that will be boosted or cut.1 page ([UTILITY] key ¡ [F2] key). For the HIGH band EQ. and turning it all the way in the counter-clockwise direction will switch the EQ type to LPF (low pass filter). the EQ type to H. you can use the [ENTER] key to switch this button on/off regardless of the cursor location. Range: –18 dB– +18 dB. G G (gain) knob Set the amount of boost or cut. (attenuation) knob Set the amount of attenuation for the signal before it enters the EQ. 54 — Reference Guide . If the LOW or HIGH bands are set to HPF or LPF respectively.SHELF (shelving). LPF/H.SHELF (HIGH band only) B ATT. turning the Q knob all the way in the clockwise direction will switch Tip! The Q.SHELF (shelving).1 kHz C EQ CURVE This graphically displays the EQ settings.10.EQ/ATT/GRP screen EQ/Att page EQ and attenuation settings [Function] Make four-band EQ and attenuation settings for the selected channel. operating these keys or controls will automatically cause the EQ/ATT page to automatically appear if any other page is currently selected. If AUTO EQ DISPLAY is turned “ON” in the UTILITY screen Prefer. HPF/L. Range: 10–0. and G parameters of each band can also be controlled by the EQ [HIGH]/[HIMID]/[LO-MID]/[LOW] keys and EQ [Q]/[F]/ [G] keys located at the right of the display. and turning it all the way in the counter-clockwise direction will switch the EQ type to HPF (high pass filter). When this page is displayed. 1 2 3 4 [Key operation] • [EQ] key ¡ [F1] key (EQ/Att) key • Repeatedly press the [EQ] key until the screen shown at the right appears. Range: 21 Hz–20. E Q knob This sets the steepness at which the boost/cut will occur at the center frequency specified by the F knob. [Mouse operation] M button ¡ EQ button ¡ EQ/Att tab 5 6 7 [Screen functions] A EQ ON button This switches EQ on/off. F.

Only the attenuation setting will be copied. TO ALL) key Copy the attenuation setting of the selected channel to all channels. the stereo output channel is excepted. and move the cursor to the ATT. To execute the copy. Access the EQ/Att page for the copy source channel. a message of “Can’t Copy This Parameter” will appear. For the procedure refer to page 47. If you wish to copy EQ settings. and the copy will not occur. Press the [SHIFT] key + [F5] key. F1 F2 F5 • [F1] (FLAT) key Reset all bands to a boost/cut amount of 0. knob. If the cursor is at a location other than the ATT. EQ/ATT /GRP — Reference Guide 55 .EQ/ATT/GRP screen I Additional functions in the EQ/ Att page In the EQ/Att page you can press the [SHIFT] key to assign the following additional functions to the [F1]–[F2] and [F5] keys. (However. • [F2] (BAND FLAT) key Reset only the selected band to a boost/cut amount of 0. G Copying the attenuation setting to all channels [Procedure] 1. you must store the settings in the library and recall them into the copy destination channel. asking you to confirm the copy. knob.) 3.0 dB (off if HPF/LPF is selected). A CONFIRMATION popup window will appear. • [F5] (COPY ATT. move the cursor to the OK button and press the [ENTER] key.0 dB (off if HPF/LPF is selected). 2.

and the recall will not occur. (library number) This shows the library number 1–128. I ROM A write-protect symbol is displayed for recallonly programs (library numbers 1–40). E RECALL button Recall the currently selected EQ program from the list. Tip! For details on the EQ programs that are preset in the EQ library. C Output meter This meter shows the post-EQ output level. B EQ graph This graphically displays the EQ settings. H LIBRARY TITLE This shows the names assigned to each library number. D TITLE EDIT button Use this to edit the name (library title) of the EQ program stored in the EQ library.” Library numbers 1–40 are recall-only preset memories. and cannot be stored.EQ/ATT/GRP screen Library page Store or recall EQ settings [Function] Store EQ settings in the EQ library. G LIBRARY No. refer to Operation Guide P. For details on inputting characters. Numbers in which no EQ program has been stored are displayed as “No Data!. If you attempt to recall a number in which no data has been stored.” and their title cannot be changed. or recall a stored EQ program.60. 2 3 [Key operation] • [EQ] key ¡ [F2] (Library) key • Repeatedly press the [EQ] key until the screen shown at the right appears. a message of “ERROR NO DATA TO RECALL” will appear. You can store only in library numbers 41–128. Move the cursor to the TITLE EDIT button and press the [ENTER] key to access the TITLE EDIT popup window where you can input a name. the EQ program that was previously stored in that number will be erased. refer to the appendix “Preset EQ Program Parameters. • Library numbers 1–40 are recall-only preset memories. and their names cannot be changed. • When you store. 56 — Reference Guide . A library name of up to 16 characters can be input. 1 [Mouse operation] M button ¡ EQ button ¡ Library tab 4 5 6 J7 8 9 K [Screen functions] A SEL CH This indicates the currently selected channel. F STORE button Store the current EQ settings.

access the UTILITY screen Prefer.EQ/ATT/GRP screen J Selected program The EQ program selected for store/recall is enclosed by a dotted frame in the EQ library list. 2. • [F3] (STORE) Store the current EQ settings. 3. To do so. the same settings will be recalled into both channels. 3. A CONFIRMATION popup window will appear. If you attempt to recall a number in which nothing has been stored. and the recall will not occur. 4. G Recalling EQ settings from the EQ library [Procedure] F1 F2 F3 1. — Reference Guide 57 . I Additional functions in the Library page In the Library page you can press the [SHIFT] key to assign the following functions to the [F1]–[F3] keys. This is the same function as the 5 RECALL button. This is the same function as the 6 STORE button. without displaying the CONFIRMATION popup window. the curve of the currently selected EQ program is shown as a graph.1 page ([UTILITY] key ¡ [F2] key) and turn RECALL CONFIRMATION off. 4. When you store. Tip! • It is possible to recall the EQ settings immediately. • [F1] (TITLE EDIT) key Use this to edit the name (library title) of an EQ program stored in the EQ library. Move the cursor to the OK button and press the [ENTER] key. Use the [DATA/JOG] dial to select the library number 1–128 that you wish to recall.1 page ([UTILITY] key ¡ [F2] key) and turn STORE CONFIRMATION off. and access the EQ/ATT/GRP screen Library page. To do so. access the UTILITY screen Prefer. K EQ CURVE Of the EQ programs stored in the library. • [F2] (RECALL) key Recall the currently selected EQ program from the list. 2. • When you recall an EQ program to a paired channel. Move the cursor to the RECALL button and press the [ENTER] key. asking you to confirm the recall operation. Move the cursor to the OK button and press the [ENTER] key. an error message of “ERROR NO DATA TO RECALL” will appear. G Storing EQ settings in the EQ library [Procedure] 1. For details on inputting characters. the EQ program that had been previously stored in that number will be erased. The recall will be executed. allowing you to assign a name to the EQ program. Tip! It is possible to store the EQ settings immediately. This is the same function as the 4 TITLE EDIT button. without displaying the TITLE EDIT popup window. Select the channel into which you wish to recall the EQ settings. refer to Operation Guide P. Select the EQ settings that you wish to store. Input the library title as desired. Move the cursor to the STORE button and press the [ENTER] key.60. The TITLE EDIT popup window will appear. Use the [DATA/JOG] dial to select the store destination library number 41–128. 5. and access the EQ/ ATT/GRP screen Library page. The EQ settings will be stored. In this page you can use the [DATA/JOG] dial to select the EQ program regardless of the cursor location.

If channels are assigned to a fader group. Tip! If you wish to adjust the position of a fader assigned to a group. Doing so will strain the motor and cause malfunctions. Do not manually operate two or more faders of a group at the same time. 1 2 [Mouse operation] M button ¡ EQ button ¡ FaderGrp tab [Screen functions] A Fader groups A–D The G symbols indicate the fader group A–D to which each input channel 1–24 and monitor channel 1–16 belongs. When you press the [SEL] key once again. you can move a single fader to control all the faders in that group while preserving the current balance.EQ/ATT/GRP screen FaderGrp page Set and cancel fader groups [Function] Assign input channels 1–24/monitor channels 1–16 to fader groups A–D. B ENABLE button Turn fader groups A–D on/off. you can use the ENABLE button to temporarily disable that group. I Additional functions in the FaderGrp page In the FaderGrp page you can press the [SHIFT] key to assign the following additional function to the [F1] key. If a channel that is already assigned to a fader group is assigned to another group. When you move the cursor up or down to select group A–D and use the [SEL] key to select a channel. F1 A channel cannot belong to more than one fader group. only the newly assigned group will be valid. the channel will be removed from the fader group. that channel will be assigned to the corresponding fader group. 58 — Reference Guide . • [F1] (ALL CLEAR) key Clear all fader group settings. [Key operation] • [EQ] key ¡ [F3] (FaderGrp) key • Repeatedly press the [EQ] key until the screen shown at the right appears.

the channel will be removed from the mute group. When you press the [SEL] key once again. only the newly assigned group will be valid. F1 A channel cannot belong to more than one mute group. I Additional functions in the Mute Grp page In the Mute Grp page you can press the [SHIFT] key to assign the following additional function to the [F1] key. B ENABLE button Turn mute groups E–H on/off. If channels are assigned to a mute group.EQ/ATT/GRP screen Mute Grp page Set and cancel mute groups [Function] Assign input channels 1–24/monitor channels 1–16 to mute groups E–H. that channel will be assigned to the corresponding mute group. 1 2 [Mouse operation] M button ¡ EQ button ¡ Mute Grp tab [Screen functions] A Mute groups E–H The G symbols indicate the mute group E–H to which each input channel 1–24 and monitor channel 1–16 belongs. If a channel that is already assigned to a mute group is assigned to another group. Tip! A mute group may contain both channels that are On and channels that are Off. • [F1] (ALL CLEAR) key Clear all mute group settings. you can operate a single [ON] key to switch the on/off status of all [ON] keys in that group. When you move the cursor up or down to select mute group E–H and use the [SEL] key to select a channel. If a mute group contains channels that are On and channels that are Off. — Reference Guide 59 . [Key operation] • [EQ] key ¡ [F4] (Mute Grp) key • Repeatedly press the [EQ] key until the screen shown at the right appears. Tip! If you wish to change the on/off status after assigning a channel to a group. operating the [ON] key of one of the channels will turn off the channels that are on. you can use the ENABLE button of that group to temporarily disable the group. and turn on the channels that are off.

For the stereo out channel and for paired channels. Edit page Dynamics processor parameter settings [Function] Set the dynamics processor parameters for the selected channel. 2 67 [Key operation] • [DYN] key ¡ [F1] (Dyn. both channels will operate simultaneously. LEFT (POST EQ) or LEFT (PRE EQ) cannot be selected for input channel 1. Return channels 1/2 do not have dynamics processors. 60 — Reference Guide . the key-in signal source channel will be shown here. When Stereo Link is turned on. C ST LINK ON/OFF (stereo link on/off) button If this button is on. the dynamics processor settings of the odd-numbered channel will be copied to the even-numbered channel. this Stereo Link setting will always be on and cannot be defeated. B Channel If LEFT is selected as the KEYIN SOURCE (1). 1 8 9 [Mouse operation] M button ¡ DYN button ¡ Dyn. monitor channel 1. Edit) key • Repeatedly press the [DYN] key until the screen shown at the right appears. G SELF (POST EQ) The post-EQ signal of the same channel G SELF (PRE EQ) The pre-EQ signal of the same channel G AUX 1 OUT The signal being output to AUX bus 1 G AUX 2 OUT The signal being output to AUX bus 2 G LEFT (POST EQ) The post-EQ signal of the next channel to the left G LEFT (PRE EQ) The pre-EQ signal of the next channel to the left Tip! If either one of two paired channels exceeds the threshold level.DYN/DLY screen Dyn. dynamics processor parameter settings and operation will be linked for adjacent odd-numbered ¡ even-numbered channels. or the stereo output channel. Edit tab 3 4 5 J [Screen functions] A KEYIN SOURCE Select one of the following key-in signals to control the dynamics processor.

If the ST LINK ON/OFF button is off. R (right/even-numbered channel). J PARAMETER Set the parameters of the dynamics processor.47. If you wish to use a specific type. you must recall a program that uses that type from the library. E ON/OFF This button turns the dynamics processor on/off. For details on parameters and their functions.” — Reference Guide 61 DYN/ DLY . G COMP (compressor) G EXPAND (expander) G GATE G COMPANDER (HARD/SOFT) G DUCKING The type cannot be changed in this page. press the [ENTER] key to turn the dynamics processor on/off. When the cursor is located at on/off or in the PARAMETER area. refer to the following appendices: “Dynamics Processors” and “Preset Dynamics Program Parameters. or BOTH (both channels). L (left/odd-numbered channel). H CURVE This graph shows the approximate response of the current dynamics processor settings. F GR (gain reduction) This displays the amount of gain reduction produced by the dynamics processor in dB units. The type of parameters and their range will differ depending on the currently selected type. For details on recalling a program. refer to P. this will be displayed as “----” and cannot be selected. G Level meter This shows the output level of the dynamics processor in dB units.DYN/DLY screen D Channel Select the channel(s) to which the dynamics processor will apply when the 3 ST LINK ON/ OFF button is on. The following types of dynamics processor are available. I TYPE This shows the type of the currently selected dynamics processor.

2 34 [Key operation] • [DYN] key ¡ [F2] (Library) key • Repeatedly press the [DYN] key until the screen shown at the right appears. You can input a library name of up to 16 characters. and shows the name of the dynamics processor type. refer to appendix “Preset Dynamics Program Parameters”. 1 [Mouse operation] M button ¡ DYN button ¡ Library tab 5 6 7 K 8 9 J L [Screen functions] A SEL CH This displays the currently selected recall destination channel. If you attempt to recall a number in which nothing has been stored.” and their title cannot be changed. and their name cannot be changed. F RECALL button Recall the currently selected program from the list. an error message of “ERROR NO DATA TO RECALL” will be displayed. and the recall will not take place. D Level meter This shows the output level of the dynamics processor in dB units. C GR (gain reduction) This displays the amount of gain reduction produced by the dynamics processor in dB units. Tip! For details on the library preset dynamics programs. Move the cursor to the TITLE EDIT button and press the [ENTER] key to access the TITLE EDIT popup window where you can input the name.DYN/DLY screen Library page Storing and recalling dynamics processor settings [Function] Store dynamics processor settings in the library. Numbers in which no dynamics program has been stored are displayed as “No Data!. B Curve/type This indicates the approximate dynamics curve of the currently selected channel. or recall stored programs. Library numbers 1–40 are recall-only preset programs. E TITLE EDIT button Use this when you wish to edit the name (library title) of the dynamics program saved in the library. 62 — Reference Guide .

This is the same function as the 5 TITLE EDIT button. the dynamics program that had been stored in that number will be erased. Tip! Library numbers in which nothing has been stored are displayed as “No Data!” • [F2] (RECALL) key Recall the currently selected dynamics settings from the list. In this page. J ROM This write-prohibit symbol is displayed for recall-only library numbers 1–40. K Selected program Store/recall operations will apply to the program enclosed by a dotted line in the library list. • [F3] (STORE) key Store the current dynamics settings. the response and type of the currently selected dynamics program are shown in this area. • Library numbers 1–40 are recall-only.DYN/DLY screen G STORE button Store the current dynamics settings. L CURVE/TYPE Of the dynamics programs stored in the library. This is the same function as the 6 RECALL button. (library number) This displays the library number 1–128. You can store only to library numbers 41–128. H LIBRARY No. F1 F2 F3 I LIBRARY TITLE This displays the name assigned to the library and the type of dynamics processor. • [F1] (TITLE EDIT) key Use this to edit the name (library title) assigned to settings in the library. — Reference Guide 63 . I Additional functions in the Library page In the Library page you can press the [SHIFT] key to assign the following functions to the [F1]–[F3] keys. This is the same function as the 7 STORE button. • When you execute the Store operation. regardless of where the cursor is located. you can always use the [DATA/ JOG] dial to select the program. data cannot be stored in them.

Move the cursor to the STORE button and press the [ENTER] key. refer to Operation Guide P. Select the recall destination channel. The TITLE EDIT popup window will appear. 64 — Reference Guide .60. 4. and access the DYN/DLY screen Library page. 2. 3. allowing you to input a name. Input the library title.1 page ([UTILITY] key ¡ [F2] key) and turn STORE CONFIRMATION off. Tip! It is possible to recall the library data without seeing the CONFIRMATION popup window. The Store operation will be executed. and turn RECALL CONFIRMATION off. access the UTILITY screen Prefer. 4. To do so. To do so. Use the [DATA/JOG] dial to select the library number that you wish to recall. Move the cursor to the OK button and press the [ENTER] key. Library numbers in which nothing has been stored are displayed as “No Data!” G Recalling dynamics settings from the library [Procedure] 1. A confirmation message will appear. For details on inputting characters. Use the [DATA/JOG] dial to select the library number 41–128 in which you will store the settings. Tip! When you recall a dynamics program into a paired channel. Move the cursor to the RECALL button and press the [ENTER] key. the same settings will be recalled into both channels. access the UTILITY screen Prefer.DYN/DLY screen G Storing dynamics settings in the library [Procedure] 1. 2. and access the DYN/DLY screen Library page. The recall will be executed. Tip! It is also possible to store the settings directly into the library without accessing the TITLE EDIT popup window. Select the channel whose settings you wish to store.1 page ([UTILITY] key ¡ [F2] key). 3.

DYN/DLY screen Dly/ø1–16. Dly/øMONI tab G Dly/ø17–24 [Screen functions] A Channel This displays the channels for which you can make delay and phase settings. The upper row shows the delay in ms (millisecond) units. and the lower row shows the delay in sample units. — Reference Guide 65 . Adjusting either one will cause the other value to change in tandem. C ON/OFF Switch the delay on/off. [F4] (Dly/ø17–24) key/[F5] (Dly/øMONI) key • Repeatedly press the [DYN] key until the desired page appears. Dly/ø17–24. 1 2 3 4 B DELAY Set the delay time for the signal of each channel. 1 2 3 4 Tip! Phase (ø) will operate independently even for paired channels. Dly/ø17–24 tab. Dly/øMONI pages Set delay and phase [Function] Set the delay and phase of each channel. G Dly/øMONI D ø (phase) Switch the phase of each channel. 1 2 3 4 [Mouse operation] M button ¡ DYN button ¡ Dly/ø1–16 tab. G Dly/ø1–16 [Key operation] • [DYN] key ¡ [F3] (Dly/ø1–16) key.

Dly/øMONI pages you can press the [SHIFT] key to assign the following additional function to the [F5] key. Dly/ø17–24. 3. 66 — Reference Guide . 4. F5 • [F5] (COPY TO ALL) key Copy the delay time or phase setting selected by the cursor to all other channels. Press the [SHIFT] key + [F5] key. G Copying delay time or phase settings to other channels 1. Dly/øMONI page.DYN/DLY screen I Additional functions in the Dly/ øpages In the Dly/ø1–16. Access the DYN/DLY screen Dly/ø1–16. Dly/ø17–24. Move the cursor to the OK button and press the [ENTER] key. Move the cursor to the delay time parameter or the ø button of the copy source channel. The following confirmation screen will appear. 2.

AUX1–AUX6 screens
Pre/Pst IN, Pre/Pst MONI pages
Make on/off and pre/post settings for the AUX sends
[Function]
Make on/off and pre/post settings for the signal sent from the input channels, return channels, and monitor channels to AUX buses 1–6. G Pre/Pst IN

[Key operation]
• [AUX 1]–[AUX 6] keys ¡ [F1] (Pre/ Pst IN) key/[F2] (Pre/Pst MONI) key • Repeatedly press an [AUX 1]–[AUX 6] key until the desired page appears.

1

[Mouse operation]
M button ¡ AUX 1–AUX 6 buttons ¡ Pre/Pst IN tab/Pre/Pst MONI tab

42 3

[Screen functions]
A Channels
This area shows the channels whose AUX send pre/post settings are being switched.
AUX1– AUX6
— Reference Guide

G Pre/Pst MONI

B ON/OFF buttons
These buttons are on/off switches for the signal that is sent from each channel to the corresponding AUX bus.

3 2 1 4

C PRE/POST buttons
These buttons switch the signal sent from each channel to the corresponding AUX bus between prefader and post-fader locations.

D Send levels
These indicate the send level values of each channel.

E GBL (global)
If you move the cursor to the PRE button or the POST button and press the [ENTER] key, the pre/post setting of all channels in that page will be switched together.

67

AUX1–AUX6 screens

I Additional functions in the Pre/ Pst IN, Pre/Pst MONI pages
In the Pre/Pst IN/Pre/Pst MONI pages, you can press the [SHIFT] key to assign the following functions to the [F1]–[F2] keys.

F1

F2

• [F1] (GLOBAL PRE) key
Switch all channels in that page to pre-fader. This is the same function as the PRE button in the GBL area 5.

• [F2] (GLOBAL POST) key
Switch all channels in that page to post-fader. This is the same function as the POST button in the GBL area 5.

68

— Reference Guide

AUX7/EFF1 and AUX8/EFF2 screens
Eff. Edit page
Edit internal effects 1/2
[Function]
Edit the parameters of the effect that is selected for internal effect 1 (AUX7/EFF1 screen) or external effect 2 (AUX8/EFF2).

3

5

[Key operation]
• [AUX 7] key/[AUX 8] ¡ [F1] (Eff. Edit) key • Repeatedly press the [AUX 7] key or [AUX 8] key until the desired screen appears

1 2 4

[Mouse operation]
M button ¡ EFF 1 button/EFF 2 button ¡ Eff. Edit tab

6 7

A USED AS (effect usage method)
If the effect is patched to AUX send/return this will indicate “AUX 7”/”AUX 8.” If the effect is patched to a specific channel this will indicate “INSERT.”

D EFFECT TYPE
This shows the name of the currently used effect type. A graphic indicating the effect type is also displayed as the right.

Tip!
The choice of AUX send/return or insertion is made in the SET UP screen Patch IN page.

B BYPASS ON/OFF button
This button switches effect bypass on/off. This ON/OFF button can be switched by pressing the [ENTER] key regardless of where the cursor is located.

It is not possible to change the effect type in this page. If you wish to use a specific effect type, load a program using that effect type from the effect library (¡ P.71).

E Output meter
This level meter shows the effect output level.

F Effect parameters
Use the knobs displayed in this area to edit the effect parameter values. The type of parameters will differ depending on the currently-used effect type.

C CURRENT EFFECT NAME
This shows the name of the currently used effect program.

— Reference Guide

69

AUX7/EFF1 AUX8/EFF2

[Screen functions]

F1 Tip! This knob will be located in the same place regardless of the effect type. (mix balance) knob This knob adjust the mix amount of the effect sound. A setting of 0% will output only the original sound.AUX7/EFF1 and AUX8/EFF2 screens G MIX BAL. I Additional functions in the Eff Edit page In the Eff Edit page you can press the [SHIFT] key to assign the following function to the [F1] key. 70 — Reference Guide . 50% will output equal amounts of direct and effect sound. If the effect is inserted in a specific channel. This is the same function as the 2 BYPASS ON/OFF button. and 100% will output only the effect sound. • [F1] (BYPASS ON/OFF) key Switch effect bypass on/off. If the effect is patched via AUX send/return. adjust this to the desired value. set this to 100%.

F STORE button Store the current effect settings. or recall a stored effect program. and cannot be stored. This shows the library number 1–128. refer to Operation Guide P. H LIBRARY TITLE This shows the name assigned to each library number. Refer to P. E RECALL button Recall the currently selected effect program from the list.” and monaural effect types are indicated by “M. a message of “ERROR NO DATA TO RECALL” will appear. Numbers in which no effect program has been stored will be displayed as “No Data!. I S/M (stereo/monaural) This indicates whether the effect type used by each program is stereo or monaural. and the recall will not take place. Stereo effect types are indicated by “S. Tip! For the programs that are preset in the effect library. 3 [Key operation] • [AUX 7]–[AUX 8] keys ¡ [F2] (Library) key • Repeatedly press an [AUX 7]–[AUX 8] key until the desired screen appears 1 2 4 5 6 [Mouse operation] M button ¡ EFF 1–EFF 2 button ¡ Library tab K7 8 9J L [Screen functions] A CURRENT EFFECT NAME B EFFECT TYPE C Output meter These are the same as in the Eff.60. • When you execute the Store operation. For details on inputting characters. • Library numbers 1–41 are recall-only presets.” If you select and attempt to recall a number in which nothing has been stored. the effect program that had been stored in that number will be erased. Settings can be stored only in library numbers 42–128.69. (library number) Library numbers 1–41 are recall-only presets. their name cannot be edited.AUX7/EFF1 and AUX8/EFF2 screens Library page Store or recall an effect program [Function] Store an effect program in the library. J ROM Recall-only programs (library numbers 1–41) are indicated by a write-prohibit symbol in this column. D TITLE EDIT button Use this when you wish to edit the name (library title) of an effect program saved in the effect library. Edit page. — Reference Guide 71 . refer to the appendix “Preset Effects Programs.” and their name cannot be edited either. Move the cursor to the TITLE EDIT button and press the [ENTER] key to access the TITLE EDIT popup window where you can input the name.” G LIBRARY No.

A maximum of 16 characters can be input. This is the same function as the 5 RECALL button.1 page ([UTILITY] key ¡ [F2] key) and turn RECALL CONFIRMATION off. To do so. an error message of “ERROR NO DATA TO RECALL” will appear. This is the same function as the 6 STORE button. Access the Library page of the AUX7/EFF1 screen or the AUX8/EFF2 screen. The Store operation will be executed. and the recall will not take place. 3. • [F2] (RECALL) key Recall the currently selected effect program from the list.AUX7/EFF1 and AUX8/EFF2 screens K Selected program Store/recall operations will apply to the program enclosed by a dotted line in the library list. This is the same function as the 4 TITLE EDIT button. allowing you to assign a name to the effect program. effect program no. Move the cursor to the RECALL button and press the [ENTER] key. Move the cursor to the STORE button and press the [ENTER] key. I Additional functions in the Library page In the Library page. • [F1] (TITLE EDIT) key Use this to edit the name (library title) of the effect program saved in the library. Tip! It is possible to store the settings directly in the library without seeing the TITLE EDIT popup window. The TITLE EDIT popup window will appear. If you attempt to recall a number in which no data has been stored. The Recall operation will be executed. In general. Move the cursor to the OK button and press the [ENTER] key. • [F3] (STORE) key Store the current effect settings. you can always use the [DATA/ JOG] dial to select the program. For details on inputting characters. asking you to confirm the Recall operation. 3. Input the library title as desired. Use the [DATA/JOG] dial to select the library number that you wish to recall. the effect library is common to both effects 1 and 2. you can press the [SHIFT] key to assign the following functions to the [F1]–[F3] keys.60. Move the cursor to the OK button and press the [ENTER] key. To do so. Tip! It is possible to execute the recall immediately without seeing the CONFIRMATION popup window. When you store. Access the Library page of the AUX7/EFF1 screen or the AUX8/EFF2 screen. G Recalling an effect program from the library [Procedure] F1 F2 F3 1. 2. regardless of where the cursor is located. access the UTILITY screen Prefer. Use the [DATA/JOG] dial to select the store destination library number 42–128.19 “HQ-Pitch” can be used only by effect 2. G Storing an effect program in the library [Procedure] 1. the effect program that had been stored in that number will be erased. The CONFIRMATION popup window will appear. However. 4. 72 — Reference Guide . 4. refer to Operation Guide P. access the UTILITY screen Prefer. In this page. 5.1 page ([UTILITY] key ¡ [F2] key) and turn STORE CONFIRMATION off. 2. L EFFECT TYPE This displays the effect type used by the program currently selected for store or recall.

AUX7/EFF1 and AUX8/EFF2 screens Pre/Pst IN. and monitor channels to AUX buses 7/ 8 (effects 1/2). D Send levels These indicate the send level values of each channel. the pre/post setting of all channels in that page will be switched together. 5 1 [Mouse operation] M button ¡ EFF 1 button/EFF 2 button ¡ Pre/Pst IN tab/Pre/Pst MONI tab 42 3 [Screen functions] A Channels This area shows the channels whose effect send pre/post settings are being switched. 3 2 1 4 5 C PRE/POST buttons These buttons select either prefader or post-fader signals to be sent from each channel to the effect send. G Pre/Pst MONI B ON/OFF buttons These buttons are on/off switches for the signal that is sent from each channel to effect 1/2. G Pre/Pst IN [Key operation] • [AUX 7] key/[AUX 8] key ¡ [F3] (Pre/Pst IN) key/[F4] (Pre/Pst MONI) key • Repeatedly press the [AUX 7] key or [AUX 8] key until the desired page appears. return channels. E GBL (global) If you move the cursor to the PRE button or the POST button and press the [ENTER] key. — Reference Guide 73 . Pre/Pst MONI pages Make on/off and pre/post settings for the effect sends [Function] Make on/off and pre/post settings for the signal sent from the input channels.

it is not possible to send signals from return channel 2 to AUX8. This is the same function as the PRE button in the GBL area 5. This is the same function as the POST button in the GBL area 5. This is to prevent the return signal of an effect from being accidentally returned to the same effect. • [F2] (GLOBAL POST) key Switch all channels in that page to post-fader. F1 F2 • [F1] (GLOBAL PRE) key Switch all channels in that page to pre-fader. I Additional functions in the Pre/ Pst IN/Pre/Pst MONI pages In the Pre/Pst IN/Pre/Pst MONI pages. Likewise. you can press the [SHIFT] key to assign the following functions to the [F1]–[F2] keys. creating a loop. 74 — Reference Guide .AUX7/EFF1 and AUX8/EFF2 screens It is not possible to send signals from return channel 1 to AUX7.

1 [Key operation] • [HOME] key ¡ [F1] (1–24/Rtn) key • Repeatedly press the [HOME] key until the screen shown at the right appears [Mouse operation] M button ¡ HOME button ¡ 1–24/Rtn tab 2 3 4 5 [Screen functions] A Level meters These meters show the input levels of input channels 1–24 and return channels 1/2. I Additional functions in the 1–24/ Rtn page In the 1–24/Rtn page you can press the [SHIFT] key to assign the following function to the [F1] key. This is the same function as the [PEAK HOLD] key in the level meter/counter section. • [F1] (PEAK HOLD) key This key sets/defeats the Peak Hold function. a “ ” symbol will be maintained in the level meter to indicate the peak level. F1 C PRE EQ button D POST EQ button E POST FADER button Select one of these three buttons to select the location in the signal path (pre-EQ/post-EQ/ post-fader) whose level will be shown by the level meters. — Reference Guide 75 . The fader position is shown in dB units below each level meter. HOME B STEREO OUT LEVEL This shows the position of the STEREO fader in dB units.HOME screen 1–24/Rtn page Monitor the input level of the input channels [Function] Monitor the input levels of input channels 1–24 and return channels 1/2. When Peak Hold is on.

• [F1] (PEAK HOLD) key This key sets/defeats the Peak Hold function. This is the same function as the [PEAK HOLD] key in the level meter/counter section.HOME screen MONITOR page Monitor the input levels of the monitor channels [Function] Monitor the input levels of monitor channels 1–16 1 [Key operation] • [HOME] key ¡ [F2] (Monitor) key • Repeatedly press the [HOME] key until the screen shown at the right appears [Mouse operation] M button ¡ HOME button ¡ Monitor tab 2 3 4 5 [Screen functions] A Level meters These meters show the input levels of monitor channels 1–16. I Additional functions in the Monitor page In the Monitor page you can press the [SHIFT] key to assign the following function to the [F1] key. F1 C PRE EQ button D POST EQ button E POST FADER button Select one of these three buttons to select the location in the signal path (pre-EQ/post-EQ/ post-fader) whose level will be shown by the level meters. 76 — Reference Guide . B STEREO OUT LEVEL This shows the position of the STEREO fader in dB units. The fader position of each channel is shown in dB units below each level meter.

In this page you can also adjust the master level of each bus. move the cursor to the desired fader and rotate the [DATA/ JOG] dial. 1 [Key operation] • [HOME] key ¡ [F3] (Bus) key • Repeatedly press the [HOME] key until the screen shown at the right appears [Mouse operation] M button ¡ HOME button ¡ Bus tab 2 3 4 5 [Screen functions] A Level meters These meters show the output levels of buses 1– 8/AUX buses 1–8. — Reference Guide 77 . B Faders These faders adjust the master level of buses 1– 8/AUX buses 1–8. D PRE FADER (pre-fader) button E POST FADER (post-fader) button Select one of these two buttons to select the location in the signal path (pre-fader/post-fader) whose level will be shown by the level meters. I Additional functions in the Bus page In the Bus page you can press the [SHIFT] key to assign the following function to the [F1] key. F1 Tip! To adjust the value of a fader. This is the same function as the [PEAK HOLD] key in the level meter/counter section. • [F1] (PEAK HOLD) key This key sets/defeats the Peak Hold function.HOME screen Bus page Monitor the output levels of buses 1–8/AUX buses 1–8 [Function] Monitor the output level of buses 1–8 and AUX buses 1–8. The fader location of each bus is shown in dB units below each fader. C STEREO OUT LEVEL The location of the STEREO fader is shown in dB units.

F1 C STEREO OUT LEVEL This shows the position of the STEREO fader in dB units. I Additional functions in the Omni/ ST page In the Omni/ST page you can press the [SHIFT] key to assign the following function to the [F1] key. The PRE FADER button/POST FADER button setting will not affect the OMNI OUT level meter display. B STEREO OUT level meter This meters shows the output level of stereo output. The type of signal assigned to each OMNI OUT jack is indicated below each level meter. assignments cannot be changed in this page.HOME screen Omni/ST page Monitor the output levels of the OMNI OUT jacks and stereo output [Function] Monitor the output levels of OMNI OUT jacks 1–4 and the stereo output. 78 — Reference Guide . • [F1] (PEAK HOLD) key This key sets/defeats the Peak Hold function. [Key operation] • [HOME] key ¡ [F4] (Omni/ST) key • Repeatedly press the [HOME] key until the screen shown at the right appears 1 [Mouse operation] M button ¡ HOME button ¡ Omni/St tab 2 3 4 5 [Screen functions] A OMNI OUT level meters These meters show the output level of OMNI OUT jacks 1–4. D PRE FADER (pre-fader) button E POST FADER (post-fader) button Select one of these two buttons to select the location in the signal path (pre-fader/post-fader) whose level will be shown by the STEREO OUT level meters. This is the same function as the [PEAK HOLD] key in the level meter/counter section. Tip! This page is for display only. The signals assigned to OMNI OUT jacks 1–4 can be selected in the SETUP screen Patch OUT page.

The signals assigned to each OUTPUT of an option I/O card can be selected in the SETUP screen Patch OUT page. — Reference Guide 79 . the assignments cannot be changed here. The type of signal assigned to each OUTPUT is indicated below each level meter. This is the same function as the [PEAK HOLD] key in the level meter/counter section. I Additional functions in the Option page In the Option page you can press the [SHIFT] key to assign the following function to the [F1] key. [Key operation] • [HOME] key ¡ [F5] (Option) key • Repeatedly press the [HOME] key until the screen shown at the right appears 1 [Mouse operation] M button ¡ HOME button ¡ Option tab 2 [Screen functions] A Level meters These meters shows the output levels of the option I/O cards inserted in slots 1/2.HOME screen Option page Monitor the output level of option I/O cards [Function] Monitor the output level of option I/O cards inserted in slots 1/2 of the AW4416. Tip! This page is for display only. B STEREO OUT LEVEL The position of the STEREO fader is shown in dB units. F1 • [F1] (PEAK HOLD) key This key sets/defeats the Peak Hold function.

Note The total length of the samples that can be assigned to the sampling pads is a maximum of 90 seconds (for a 44. D T (track) This column shows the track number (1–16). 80 — Reference Guide . E N (name) This column shows the virtual track name. SEL (region select) button This button selects the region that will be assigned to the pad. 1 2 3 [Mouse operation] M button ¡ SAMP. If you wish to use part of a region that is longer than this. 4 5 6 7 [Key operation] • Sampling pad section [EDIT] pad ¡ [F1] (From Rgn. PAD EDIT button ¡ From Rgn. B RGN. C EXECUTE button This button executes the assignment. the region you selected in 2 will be assigned to the pad you selected in 1. you must first divide the region appropriately (EDIT screen TR Edit page). page Assign a region to a sampling pad [Function] Assign a region (continuous audio data recorded in one operation) to a sampling pad. tab 8 [Screen functions] A PAD SEL (pad select) button This button selects the pad to which a region will be assigned. F V (virtual track) This column shows the virtual track number (1– 8) selected for each track.) key • Repeatedly press the [EDIT] pad until the screen shown at the right appears. G Track view This area shows a bar graph to indicate the regions included in each track. When you move the cursor to this button and press the [ENTER] key.1 kHz/16 bit song). Tracks in which nothing has been recorded are displayed as “-NO REC-”. PAD screen From Rgn. H Parameter area In this area you can set the parameters for the selected menu.SAMP.

Sampling pads. • [F2] (X-ZOOM IN) key Each time you press the [SHIFT] key + [F2] (XZOOM IN) key. page you can press the [SHIFT] key to assign the following additional functions to the [F1]–[F3] keys. the track view 7 will zoomout horizontally (three stages). page In the From Rgn. Tip! For the procedure of assigning a region to a pad.” — Reference Guide 81 SAMP. the track view 7 will zoom-in horizontally (three stages). F1 F2 F3 • [F1] (REMAIN) key This causes the counter/level meter and the counter at the top of the display to show the remaining time available for recording in the track. • [F3] (X-ZOOM OUT) key Each time you press the [SHIFT] key + [F3] (XZOOM OUT) key. refer to Operation Guide “Chapter 12. PAD .SAMP. PAD screen I Additional functions in the From Rgn.

1 [Mouse operation] M button ¡ SAMP. CD-DA data can be imported only for songs whose sampling frequency is 44. in units of “minutes:seconds:frames (1/75 seconds). Tip! Later. The value at the right shows the total time of that track. I Additional functions in the CD Import page In the CD Import page you can press the [SHIFT] key to assign the following additional functions to the [F1]–[F2] keys. Pads to which no sample has been assigned will be displayed as “-NO ASN-”. and rotate the [DATA/JOG] dial to select a track. Move the cursor to this list. Samples can be trimmed in the SAMP. processing cannot be cancelled once the operation has been executed. F1 F2 • [F1] (CD LOAD) key Close the tray of the CD-RW drive. and assign it to a sampling pad. Also.SAMP. B ASSIGN TO Select the pad to which you wish to assign CDDA data. D EXTRACT POINT Select the area of the track specified in 3 that will be assigned to the pad.” Move the cursor to this area and use the [DATA/ JOG] dial to specify the START (start point) and END (end point). Execution of this operation requires a longer time than the actual time length of the data. • [F2] (CD UNLOAD) key Eject the tray of the CD-RW drive. PAD screen CD Import page Assign CD-DA to a sampling pad [Function] Import CD-DA (CD audio) audio data from an audio CD/mixed-mode CD-ROM inserted in an internal or external CD-RW drive.PAD EDIT button ¡ CD Import tab 3 4 5 [Screen functions] A DRIVE Move the cursor to this area and rotate the [DATA/JOG] dial to select the internal or external CD-RW drive. E EXECUTE button This button executes the sample import operation. 82 — Reference Guide . C TRACK/TOTAL This is the track list of the audio CD/mixedmode CD-ROM inserted in the CD-RW drive. you can trim the sample assigned to the pad to make even finer adjustments.1 kHz.86). PAD screen PAD Edit page (¡ P. 2 [Key operation] • Sampling pad section [EDIT] pad ¡ [F2] (CD Import) key • Repeatedly press the [EDIT] key until the screen shown at the right appears.

assign the pad outputs to paired channels. Tip! So that the samples assigned to the two pads will play back in stereo. and the L/R channels of the CD-DA data will be assigned to these. 4. The tray of the CD-RW drive will close. Move the cursor to the OK button and press the [ENTER] key.. and press [SHIFT] key + [F2] (CD UNLOAD) key. B–1/B–2) and automatically specified as a pair. A confirmation message like the following will appear. Move the cursor to the ASSIGN TO area. Move the cursor to the EXTRACT POINT area. and use the [DATA/JOG] dial to specify START (start point) and END (end point) to select the area that will be assigned to the pad. To execute the sample import. 6. The tray of the CD-RW drive will be ejected. Move the cursor to the TRACK/TOTAL area. (SETUP screen Patch IN page) — Reference Guide 83 . Move the cursor to the DRIVE area. The AW4416 will recognize the CD that was inserted. The sample import will be executed. PAD screen G Assigning CD-DA data to a sampling pad [Procedure] 1. In this page a pair of adjacent odd-numbered ¡ even-numbered pads of the same bank will be selected (e.g. 8. 7. and use the [DATA/JOG] dial to select the track from which you wish to import. A–1/A–2.2 page ([UTILITY] key ¡ [F3] key) and change the CD/DAT DIGITAL REC button display to ENABLE. 5. and a display like the following will appear. Access the SAMP.SAMP. and press the [SHIFT] key + [F1] (CD LOAD) key. and press the [ENTER] key. move the cursor to the EXECUTE button and press the [ENTER] key. 2. access the UTILITY screen/Prefer. If a message of “Prohibit CD Import” appears instead of this message. use the [DATA/JOG] dial to select the SCSI ID of the CD-RW drive. and use the [DATA/JOG] dial to select the bank and pad number to which the CDDA data will be assigned. and the CD will be inserted. 3. Place an audio CD or mixed-mode CD in the tray. PAD screen CD Import page.

icons indicate WAV files. G FILE The file name/directory name is displayed. C File list This shows a list of the WAV files on the internal CD-RW drive or external SCSI device. and assign it to a sampling pad. Pads to which no sample is assigned are displayed as “-NO ASN-”. This list contains the following information. 1 [Mouse operation] M button ¡ SAMP. E EXECUTE button This button executes the WAV file import. PAD EDIT button ¡ WavImport tab 3 4 5 [Screen functions] A DRIVE Move the cursor to this area and rotate the [DATA/JOG] dial to select the internal CD-RW drive or external SCSI device. G TOTAL The playback time of the WAV file is displayed in hours/minutes/seconds/milliseconds. G TYPE The stereo ( )/monaural ( ) status of the WAV file and its quantization (word length) is displayed.WAV” following their name. and files indicate directories. B ASSIGN TO Select the pad to which you wish to assign the WAV file. or “/ WAV/” if you are in a directory named WAV located one level lower. PAD screen WAV Import page Assign a WAV file to a sampling pad [Function] Import a WAV format audio file from a CDROM or MO disk inserted in the internal CD-RW drive or an external SCSI device. The AW4416 can recognize only WAV files that have the same sampling frequency as the current song which have a filename extension of “. 84 — Reference Guide . D DIR (directory) The “/” symbol and the directory name indicate the directory in which the list shown in 3 is located. 2 [Key operation] • Sampling pad section [EDIT] pad ¡ [F3] (WavImport) key • Repeatedly press the [EDIT] pad until the screen shown at the right appears. Other files will not be displayed in the list.SAMP. For example this will indicate “/” if you are in the highest level (root directory).

The AW4416 will recognize the WAV files on the inserted media (CD-ROM. — Reference Guide 85 . and use the [DATA/JOG] dial to select the bank and pad number to which the WAV file will be assigned. 4. PAD screen I Additional functions in the Wav Import page In the Wav Import page you can press the [SHIFT] key to assign the following additional functions to the [F1]–[F2] keys. and use the [DATA/JOG] dial to select the WAV file that you wish to import. F1 F2 • [F1] (CD LOAD) key Close the tray of the CD-RW drive. and press the [ENTER] key. MO disk etc. Access the SAMP. Move the cursor to the file list. Move the cursor to the ASSIGN TO area.g. • [F2] (CD UNLOAD) key Eject the tray of the CD-RW drive. assign the pad outputs to paired channels. A popup window will ask you for confirmation. Tip! If you select a stereo WAV file in step 4... A–1/A–2. move the cursor to the EXECUTE button and press the [ENTER] key. and will display a list like the following. 5. Tip! If you want the samples assigned to the two pads to play back in stereo. To execute the sample import. 7. Move the cursor to the DRIVE area.g. 3. B–1/B–2) and automatically assigned as a pair to the L/R channels of the WAV file.). Tip! indicates the current directory. To return to the next highest directory. move the cursor to and press the [ENTER] key. 2. G Assigning a WAV file to a sampling pad [Procedure] 1. and indicates the directory above. use the [DATA/JOG] dial to select the SCSI ID of the drive. The file enclosed by the dotted lines in the center of the list is selected for the operation. Also. processing cannot be cancelled once the operation has been executed. 6.SAMP. MO drive) or the internal CD-RW drive. Move the cursor to the OK button and press the [ENTER] key. Insert the media containing the WAV file into an external SCSI device (e. PAD screen WavImport page. (SETUP screen Patch IN page) Execution of this operation requires a longer time than the actual time length of the data. The sample import will be executed. a pair of adjacent odd-numbered ¡ even-numbered pads in the same bank will be selected (e.

Undo is not possible after the pad name has been edited. [Mouse operation] M button ¡ SAMP. These buttons have the following functions. When you move the cursor to this menu and press the [ENTER] key. G EXECUTE Execute the pad erase operation. PAD EDIT button ¡ PAD Edit tab 1 2 3 4 9 [Screen functions] A NAME This menu allows you to assign the desired name to a pad. Undo is not possible after a pad has been erased. 86 — Reference Guide . a default name of “Smpltr” will be assigned automatically. G NAME Access the NAME EDIT screen where you can input a name. You can input a maximum of 8 characters. When you move the cursor to this menu and press the [ENTER] key. 56 7 8 [Key operation] • Sampling pad section [EDIT] pad ¡ [F4] (PAD Edit) key • Repeatedly press the [EDIT] pad until the screen shown at the right appears. or trim a sample. Tip! Immediately after a sample has been assigned to a pad. the following buttons will appear. G PAD Select the bank/pad number of the pad that you wish to erase. PAD screen PAD Edit page Editing a sample pad [Function] Assign a name to a sampling pad. B ERASE This menu allows you to erase the sample and name assigned to a pad.SAMP. and return the pad to its initial state. erase a pad. the following buttons will appear. These buttons have the following functions. G PAD Select the bank/pad number of the pad that you wish to name.

I Parameter area In this area you can set the parameters for the selected menu. a name of “Smpltr” will automatically be assigned.SAMP. the following buttons will appear. D TRIM OUT This menu allows you to adjust the playback end location of the sample assigned to a pad. • Trimming a sample will not increase the available memory area. G EXECUTE Execute the trim operation. When you move the cursor to this menu and press the [ENTER] key. Tip! The maximum total length of sound that can be assigned to the sampling pads is 90 seconds (for a 44. G EXECUTE Execute the trim operation. F PAD This column shows the bank and pad number (A1–A8/B1–B8). MAX (at the right edge) is the maximum RAM that can be assigned to the sampling pad.1 kHz/16 bit song). This area shows a bar graph that indicates the length of the sample assigned to each pad. Tip! For examples of editing the sampling pads. Move the cursor to the heart symbol and press the [ENTER] key to connect the heart symbol. refer to Operation Guide “Chapter 12. When you select a button for menu 1–4. G NAME (pad name) This column shows the pad name.” These buttons have the following functions. • TRIM IN/TRIM OUT cannot be undone. — Reference Guide 87 . the corresponding parameter values will appear here. When a sample is assigned to a pad. G TRIM IN Adjust the amount of trimming in sample units. In this state. When you move the cursor to this menu and press the [ENTER] key. the following buttons will appear. Sampling pads. G PAD Select the bank/pad number of the pad whose playback end location you wish to trim. pairing the two channels. G TRIM OUT Adjust the amount of trimming in sample units. G PAD Select the bank/pad number of the pad whose playback start location you wish to trim. PAD screen C TRIM IN This menu allows you to adjust the playback start location of the sample assigned to a pad. Pads to which nothing is assigned will be displayed as “-NO ASN”. E Pairing Here you can set or cancel pairing of adjacent odd-numbered/even-numbered pads. pressing either of the pads will sound both pads simultaneously. H SIZE These buttons have the following functions.

G TIMES Specify the number of times the data will be copied. These buttons have the following functions. List tab 8 [Screen functions] A COPY menu Using this menu.SAMP. START G FR. PAD screen Trig. 88 — Reference Guide . G FR. When you move the cursor here and press the [ENTER] key. G INTERVAL When copying multiple times. G TO START Specify the location in the pad track selected for TO PAD at which the data will be copied. events recorded in the convenience sequencer can be copied to another location in the same pad track or to another pad track. and edit the recorded performance. PAD that will be the copy source. List) key • Repeatedly press the [EDIT] pad until the screen shown at the right appears. END) of the pad track selected in FR. 3 4 56 7 [Key operation] • Sampling pad section [EDIT] pad ¡ [F5] (Trig. START) and end (FR. G FR.” the events following the insert location will be moved toward the end of the song for the length of the copied pattern. PAD Select the copy source pad track. If you select “OverWrite. the pattern selected as the copy source will be copied repeatedly. If you specify a multiple number of copies. If you select “Insert. G TO PAD Specify the pad track to which you wish to copy. The specified portion of the performance will be the copy source pattern. List page Recording and playing sampling pad operations [Function] Use a dedicated “convenience sequencer” to record and play back pad operations. G EXECUTE Execute the copy.” the existing events will be erased for the length of the copied pattern. this parameter specifies the interval between copy destination patterns. G INSERT Select whether the pattern will be inserted (Insert) or overwritten (OverWrite) at the copy destination. PAD EDIT button ¡ Trig. the following buttons will appear. 1 2 [Mouse operation] M button ¡ SAMP. END Specify the beginning (FR.

List page you can press the [SHIFT] key to assign the following additional functions to the [F1]–[F3] keys. For the procedure of recording or playing your pad performances. the pad track view will zoom-in horizontally (three levels). If bank A (B) is selected by the BANK pad. • [F2] (X-ZOOM IN) key Each time you press the [SHIFT] key + [F2] (XZOOM IN) key. Remaining time for recording in the track Tip! When you assign a sample to a pad. G Pad track view The timing at which trigger events are played can be recorded separately for each pad on these tracks. and your performance on the pad can be recorded as events. G PAD Select the pad track from which you wish to erase events. When you move the cursor to a button and press the [ENTER] key. • [F1] (REMAIN) key The counter will show the remaining time available for recording in the track. Pads to which nothing has been assigned will be displayed as “-NO ASN-”. press the BANK switch to change banks.SAMP. C PAD This column shows the pad and pad number (A1–A8/B1–B8). When you move the cursor to a button and press the [ENTER] key. the usual counter display will reappear. E R (recording) buttons These buttons enable recording for each pad. a specified range of events recorded in the convenience sequencer can be erased. To edit the name.86). the following buttons will appear. Tip! These buttons have the following functions. The bar graphs indicate the time from when a pad was pressed until it was released. G EXECUTE Execute the erase command. it will automatically be given a default name of “Smpltr”. • [F3] (X-ZOOM OUT) key Each time you press the [SHIFT] key + [F3] (XZOOM OUT) key. PAD screen B ERASE menu Using this menu. When you press the [SHIFT] key + [F1] (REMAIN) key once again. the O display will change to G. F M (mute) buttons These are mute switches for each pad. F1 F2 F3 D NAME (pad name) This column shows the name of each pad. and that pad track will no longer be played back. refer to Operation Guide “Chapter 12. PAD screen PAD Edit page (¡ P. Sampling pads. G START G END Specify the beginning (START) and end (END) of the range that you wish to erase from the pad track specified by PAD. the O display will change to G.” I Additional functions in the Trig. — Reference Guide 89 . the pad track view will zoom-out horizontally (three levels). use the SAMP. and copying or erasing a recorded performance. To cancel muting. List page In the Trig. pads 1–8 of bank B (A) will be forcibly muted. When you move the cursor here and press the [ENTER] key. H Parameter area The parameters required in order to execute the editing operation can be set in this area.

.. Tip! Up to 16 characters can be specified as the name of a virtual track.. Move the cursor to the 5 column and press the [ENTER] key to switch muting on (G) or off (O) for that track. B B (bus) This column indicates the type of signal that is sent to the input (recorder input) of each track 1–16.. Tip! Virtual tracks are selected in the TRACK screen V.. Tracks on which nothing has been recorded will be displayed as “-NO REC-”... The name can be edited in the EDIT screen TR Edit page.. When you record something on a track... 90 — Reference Guide ... • B1–B8 . and switch the input monitor mode or mute on/off for each track.... The abbreviations have the following significance......Tr x-y” (x=track number 1–16.Buses 1–8 • D1–D16.TRACK screen TR View page Viewing the recorded content for each track [Function] View a bar graph that shows the regions recorded on each track...Track page. C NAME This column shows the name of the virtual track currently selected for each track 1–16.... E M (mute) In this column you can turn muting on/off for each track... a default name of “V.Direct output of input channels 1–16 D V (virtual track) This column shows the virtual track number (1– 8) that is selected for each track... but only the first eight characters will be displayed in this column. 12 3 45 6 7 [Key operation] • [TRACK] key ¡ [F1] (TR View) key • Repeatedly press the [TRACK] key until the screen shown at the right appears [Mouse operation] M button ¡ TRAC button ¡ TR View tab 8 9 J K [Screen functions] A T (track) This column shows the track number 1–16. y=virtual track number 1–8) will be assigned automatically.

...Out point • A .......... Depends on the 6 input monitor setting... a message of “CANNOT CHANGE MUTE” will appear. — Reference Guide 91 .In point • O .... • If you wish to monitor a track that has been forcibly muted....... and then defeat muting for the desired track.... The INPUT MONITOR 9 setting..........Start point • E ........... G When the AUTO button is on (Auto Input Monitor) REC TRACK SELECT Stopped Off On Off On Off On Monitored signal Silence Input source Playback Playback Playback Input source F I (input monitor) This column indicates the signal that can be monitored for each track.... In this case. G When the INDI.... a message of “PLAY TRACK MUTE ON” will be displayed..End point • I .. • S .Markers 1–99 *1..... Tracks that have been forcibly muted due to limitations on the number of simultaneously playable tracks cannot be un-muted..A point • B .B point • 1–99 ......... and muting cannot be defeated...... • The mute on/off setting of the tracks does not affect the [ON] keys of the monitor channels. turning on a [REC TRACK SELECT] key that had been off will automatically cause the input source (G) to switch to playback (O)............ This is unaffected by the on/off status of the [REC TRACK SELECT] key. The symbols displayed at the bottom of the frame indicate locate points or markers that have been set in those locations.TRACK screen H ALL MUTE OFF button • On the AW4416.... The following table shows how the track monitor signal will change according to the state of the [REC TRACK SELECT] key and the transport mode when each mode is selected......... • By pressing the [ALL SAFE] key you can cancel the record-ready and muted status of all tracks............ and the current transport mode will determine which signal is being monitored for each track. This button defeats muting for all tracks. If you simply attempt to defeat muting without increasing the number of muted tracks....... Even for tracks whose 6 input monitor is set to the input source (G).. the state of the [REC TRACK SELECT] key...... It is not possible to change 6 input monitor manually... and the track playback signal is being monitored when O is displayed.......... I INPUT MONITOR Select one of the following three buttons to select the input mode (monitor source selection) for each track........... you must first turn muting on for other tracks..... button is on (Individual Input Monitor) REC TRACK SELECT Stopped Playing Recording (irrelevant) (irrelevant) (irrelevant) Monitored signal Input source or silence (*1) Input source or playback (*1) Input source or playback (*1) TRACK G Track view The regions (continuous audio data recorded in a single operation) included in each track are displayed as bar graphs in this area.. the number of tracks that can be played back simultaneously may be limited according to the quantization (word bit length) of the song and by the number of tracks being recorded simultaneously.. The track input signal is being monitored when G is displayed. The vertical line in this area indicates the current location. Playing Recording The input mode of all tracks will change automatically depending on the on/off status of the [REC TRACK SELECT] key.. You can manually change the 6 input monitor for each track.. The following types of symbols are displayed............. and tracks that cannot be played back will be forcibly muted...

For the procedure. F1 F2 F3 F4 J Current position The vertical line in the frame shows the approximate current position. the input source will be monitored for all tracks. • [F3] (X-ZOOM IN) key Each time you press the [SHIFT] key + [F3] (XZOOM IN) key. • The metronome sound will not be output while the song is stopped. it is possible to patch the metronome output signal (MET) to any of the input channels 1–24. However. • [F1] (REMAIN) key The remaining recordable time will be displayed in the level meter/counter and in the display counter area. • [F4] (X-ZOOM OUT) key Each time you press the [SHIFT] key + [F4] (XZOOM OUT) key. 92 — Reference Guide . • [F2] (WAVE) key Display the waveform for the audio of a desired track. For details refer to SETUP screen Patch IN page. This is convenient when you wish to view the waveform while searching precisely for a locate point. the internal metronome will be output from the MONITOR OUT jacks mixed with other signals. (metronome) Here you can turn the internal metronome on/ off (ON/OFF button) and adjust its volume (knob). When you press the [SHIFT] key + [F1] (REMAIN) key once again. The 6 input monitor cannot be switched manually. the track view 7 will zoom-in horizontally (three levels). The small markers below the frame show the approximate locations of each locate point. For example if you increase the number of tracks in record-ready mode from one track to two tracks.TRACK screen G When the ALL button is on (All Input Monitor) REC TRACK SELECT Stopped Playing Recording (irrelevant) (irrelevant) (irrelevant) Monitored signal Input source Input source Input source I Additional functions in the Track View page In the Track View page you can press the [SHIFT] key to assign the following additional functions to the [F1]–[F4] keys. Tip! • When the AW4416 is in its initial state. Regardless of the on/off status of the [REC TRACK SELECT] key. the normal counter display will reappear. the track view 7 will zoomout horizontally (three levels). Tip! The remaining recordable time will differ depending on the number of tracks that are currently in record-ready mode. refer to “Viewing a waveform for the audio data of a track” in the section that follows. The tempo and time signature of the metronome are set in the SONG screen Tempo Map page. K METRO. the remaining recordable time will be halved.

Rotating the [DATA/JOG] dial toward the right will move the pointer forward. and use the CURSOR [ ]/[ ] keys to select the track whose waveform you wish to view. • The audio of the corresponding track cannot be monitored while the [DATA/JOG] dial is being used to move the pointer. 2. Access the TRACK screen TR View page. If you wish to locate the song to the pointer position. move the cursor to the LOCATE button and press the [ENTER] key. • The keys of the locate/transport section cannot be used while the waveform is displayed. and rotating it toward the left will move the pointer backward. While stopped. The WAVE DISPLAY popup window will close. — Reference Guide 93 . and press the [SHIFT] key + [F2] key. rotate the [DATA/JOG] dial. move the cursor to the EXIT button and press the [ENTER] key. If you wish to move the pointer location. • This function can be used only while the song is stopped. 5. 4. and the song will locate to the location of the pointer. The WAVE DISPLAY popup window will appear. If you wish to close the WAVE DISPLAY popup window without locating.TRACK screen I Viewing a waveform for the audio data of a track 1. 2 1 3 4 1 Pointer 2 Pointer location 3 Level magnification (×1–×64) adjustment 4 Time axis magnification (×1–×4096) adjustment 3. locate the song to the place where you wish to view the waveform.

• [F1] (REMAIN) key The remaining recordable time will appear in the level meter/counter and in the counter area of the display. Of the virtual track numbers that are not currently selected. F1 C NAME This column shows the name of the virtual track that is currently selected for each track 1–16. Track page In the V. or when you select them for track editing. D VIRTUAL TRACK Move the cursor to this column and press the [ENTER] key to select the virtual track number used by each track 1–16. the normal display will reappear. 12 3 4 [Key operation] • [TRACK] key ¡ [F2] (V. Track) key • Repeatedly press the [TRACK] key until the screen shown at the right appears. tracks that have been recorded are displayed as . and set/cancel pairing between tracks. • Track pairing does not affect pairing of monitor channels. Track page Switching virtual tracks [Function] Switch the virtual track number assigned to each track 1–16. Tip! The remaining recordable time will depend on the number of tracks that is currently in record-ready mode. refer to Operation Guide “Chapter 9. Paired tracks are indicated by a “ ” symbol.TRACK screen V.” Tip! • Paired tracks will be linked when you switch virtual tracks. I Additional functions in the V. The currently selected virtual track number will be highlighted. you can pair (or cancel pairing for) two adjacent odd-numbered ¡ even-numbered tracks. Track page you can press the [SHIFT] key to assign the following additional function to [F1]. Tip! For details on operating virtual tracks. and tracks for which pairing is defeated are indicated by a “ ” symbol. When you press the [SHIFT] key + [F1] (REMAIN) key once again. 94 — Reference Guide . [Mouse operation] M button ¡ TRAC button ¡ V. Track and virtual track operations. B T (track) These are the track numbers 1–16.Track tab [Screen functions] A Pairing By moving the cursor to this area and pressing the [ENTER] key.

. C Current position The vertical line in the frame indicates the approximate current position. the recorded contents of the stereo track will be erased..... or erase the recorded contents... D STEREO OUT This meter indicates the output level of the stereo output channel....... (However.. When muting is off.. B Track view Continuous audio data in the stereo track is displayed as a bar graph........Markers 1–99 The stereo track is an L/R pair and has only one region...) When you turn muting on for the stereo track....... The pre/post-fader position can be selected in the HOME screen Omni/ST page....” button If you move the cursor to this button and press the [ENTER] key. The following types of symbols are displayed..... the previouslyrecorded content will be erased..... [Mouse operation] M button ¡ TRAC button ¡ Stereo tab 3 4 [Screen functions] A M (mute) button Use this button to switch muting on (G) or off (O) for the stereo track....) — Reference Guide 95 ....B point • 1–99 ..... you can use the [UNDO] key to return to the previous state... Recording on the AW4416.............A point • B .Out point • A . (At this time...................... tracks 1–16 will return to their previous status....TRACK screen Stereo page Playing or erasing the stereo track [Function] Play back the stereo track..... The small symbols beneath the frame indicates the approximate location of the locate points....In point • O ......... If you re-record a previous recording on the stereo track... (Normally muting is on. refer to Operation Guide “Chapter 5....End point • I .......... tracks 1–16 will be forcibly muted.............. the stereo track can be monitored via monitor channels 1/2 ¡ stereo bus... the output of the stereo track will be assigned to monitor channels 1/2.. • S .........) When you play back the song in this state......... The symbols displayed below the track view indicate locate points and markers at those locations.. 1 2 5 [Key operation] • [TRACK] key ¡ [F3] (Stereo) key • Repeatedly press the [TRACK] key until the screen shown at the right appears.Start point • E ..... E ST TRACK ERASE (stereo track erase) Tip! For details on recording/playing the stereo track.....

96 — Reference Guide . the track view 2 will zoomout horizontally in three levels.TRACK screen I Additional functions in the Stereo page In the Stereo page you can press the [SHIFT] key to assign the following additional functions to the [F1]–[F3] keys. the usual counter display will reappear. Tip! The remaining time available for recording will depend on the number of tracks that are currently in record-ready mode. • [F3] (X-ZOOM OUT) key Each time you press the [SHIFT] key + [F3] (XZOOM OUT) key. the track view 2 will zoom-in horizontally in three levels. • [F2] (X-ZOOM IN) key Each time you press the [SHIFT] key + [F2] (XZOOM IN) key. When you press the [SHIFT] key + [F1] (REMAIN) key once again. F1 F2 F3 • [F1] (REMAIN) key The level meter/counter and the counter area of the display will show the remaining time available for recording.

• The start/end points are always displayed as time code. “beat” will be the smallest unit by which a locate point can be adjusted. [Key operation] • [TRACK] key ¡ [F4] (Mark Adj. page Adjust or erase locate points or markers [Function] Adjust the position of markers or locate points such as the IN/OUT points. When you create a new song. the marker numbers will be re-assigned appropriately. and can also be set individually by using the [SET] key + [IN] key or [SET] key + [OUT] key. B Marker This area displays a list of markers 1–99. it is not possible to move a marker beyond the preceding or following marker. tab [Screen functions] A LOCATOR POSITION Display the positions of the various locate points listed below.TRACK screen Mark Adj.000. G A/B (A point/B point) These locate points can be used as the area for A-B repeat playback. • When adjusting the position of a marker. • Marker numbers are automatically assigned in sequence from the beginning of the song. the Start point will be initially set to absolute time 00:00:00. 1 2 3 [Mouse operation] M button ¡ TRAC button ¡ Mark Adj. The units used for the in/out points and the A/ B points will depend on the counter display method (time/time code/measure). These points can be set individually by using the [SET] key + [A] key or [SET] key + [B] key. When you record the song. If you delete a marker. The in/out points are automatically set at the beginning and end of the area that was last-recorded. The position of an existing locate point can be adjusted by moving the cursor to the desired numerical box and rotating the [DATA/JOG] dial. or erase locate points or markers. • If measure display is selected in the SONG screen/Setting page. G IN/OUT (in point/out point) These locate points can be used as the punchin/out points. — Reference Guide 97 . only beats will be displayed for a location earlier than the start point. Move the cursor to the MARKER column and select the marker number. regardless of the counter display method selected in the SONG screen/Setting page. Then move the cursor to the POSITION column and adjust the position of the corresponding marker.) key • Repeatedly press the [TRACK] key until the screen shown at the right appears. G START/END (start point/end point) These locate points normally correspond with the beginning and end of the song. the end of the song will automatically be set as the End point. If measure display is selected. Locate points that have not been set are displayed as “–”.

” • [F1] (REMAIN) key The level meter/counter and the counter area of the display will show the remaining time available for recording. you can press the [SHIFT] key to assign the following additional function to the [F1] key. When you press the [SHIFT] key + [F1] (REMAIN) key once again. The start point and end point cannot be deleted. page. F1 Tip! For details on setting the various locate points or modifying a locate point. Tip! The remaining time available for recording will depend on the number of tracks that are currently in record-ready mode. the usual counter display will reappear. I Additional functions in the Mark Adj. 98 — Reference Guide . Be aware that locate points or markers you delete cannot be recovered. Transport/locate operations. In this page. you can delete the locate point or marker simply by moving the cursor to it and pressing the [ENTER] key (or using the mouse to click the DELETE button). page In the Mark Adj. refer to Operation Guide “Chapter 6.TRACK screen C DELETE button (valid only when using the mouse) This button deletes a previously-set locate point or marker.

you will return to the first menu. refer to page 101. parts. Tip! If you move the cursor to the command whose button is highlighted and press the [ENTER] key. or regions. — Reference Guide 99 EDIT . G Region Edit a piece of continuous audio data that was recorded in a single operation. edit the specified area of audio data. If you move the cursor to the menu highlighted at the top of the list and press the [ENTER] key. When you move the cursor to the desired menu and press the [ENTER] key. G Track Edit the audio data of the entire currently selected track (1–16). and edit audio data by tracks. G Part Within the currently selected track. Menus Commands Parameters For details on the commands and parameters that can be selected from the TRACK/PART/ REGION menus. allowing you to select an editing command (center column in the illustration at right). a list of buttons for setting the parameters of that command will appear (right column in the illustration at right). When you then move the cursor to the desired command and press the [ENTER] key. 45 6 7 9 [Key operation] • RECORDER [EDIT] key ¡ [F1] (TR Edit) key • Repeatedly press the RECORDER [EDIT] key until the screen shown at the right appears. a list of buttons will appear. 1 2 3 [Mouse operation] M button ¡ RECORDER EDIT button ¡ TR Edit tab 8 [Screen functions] A TRACK menu B PART menu C REGION menu Select one of the following three units of data that you wish to edit.EDIT screen TR Edit page Edit tracks [Function] Assign a name to each track. you will return to the command list.

• [F3] (X-ZOOM OUT) key Each time you press the [SHIFT] key + [F3] (XZOOM OUT) key. Virtual track numbers can be changed in the TRACK screen V. The keys of the transport section will have no effect while the TR Edit page is displayed.” A name of up to 16 characters can be assigned to a virtual track. and unpaired tracks by a “ ” symbol. F NAME This column shows the name of the virtual track currently selected for each track 1–16. • [F2] (X-ZOOM IN) key Each time you press the [SHIFT] key + [F2] (XZOOM IN) key. Paired tracks are indicated by a “ ” symbol. as when copying or moving audio data. When you press the [SHIFT] key + [F1] (REMAIN) key once again. Track to be edited Edited area F1 F2 F3 • [F1] (REMAIN) key The level meter/counter and the counter area of the display will show the remaining time available for recording. Tr x-y” (x=track number 1– 16. refer to Operation Guide “Chapter 9. Tracks in which nothing has been recorded will be displayed as “-NO REC-”. Edit destination track Edit destination area I Parameter settings In this area you can set the necessary parameters for executing the edit command. the display will be as follows. When editing tracks or parts. Tip! For the track editing procedure. When selecting the edit source and edit destination tracks. the track view 8 will zoom-in on the time axis in three levels. y=virtual track number 1–8). but this column will show only the first eight characters. Tracks that have already been recorded are assigned a default name of “V. you can set/defeat pairing for adjacent odd-numbered ¡ even-numbered tracks. G V (virtual track) This shows the virtual track number (1–8) that is currently selected for each track 1–16. While editing. the usual counter display will reappear. the regions included in each track are displayed as a bar graph. both tracks of a pair will be selected for editing. I Additional functions in the TR Edit page In the TR Edit page you can press the [SHIFT] key to assign the following additional functions to the [F1]–[F3] keys. the track view 8 will zoomout on the time axis in three levels. Track/virtual track operations. Track page. H Track view In this area. the track and area selected for editing will be displayed as follows. 100 — Reference Guide .EDIT screen D Pairing By moving the cursor to this column and pressing the [ENTER] key. Edit source track Edit source area E T (track) This column shows the track numbers 1–16. The symbols displayed at the bottom of the track view area indicate locate points and markers. The vertical line in the track view area indicates the location at which the area for editing has been set.

• ALL V. all virtual tracks currently selected for tracks 1–16 will be selected for the operation.TR (all virtual tracks) Select whether all virtual tracks included in the corresponding track(s) will be copied (YES) or whether only the currently selected virtual track will be copied (NO). To do so. to make the selection read “AL-C” (ALL-CURRENT). • FR. • EXECUTE Execute the command.01% (range: 50–200%). • TRACK Select the track that you wish to shift forward or backward. • TRACK Select the track that you wish to erase. With this setting. • ALL V. • TRACK Select the track whose name you wish to edit. tracks containing no audio data cannot be selected for editing.TR (all virtual tracks) Select whether all virtual tracks included in the corresponding track(s) will be moved (YES) or whether only the currently selected virtual track will be moved (NO). • SLIP Specify the time by which the data will be shifted (range: maximum of ±5 hours). When you execute the Erase command. The commands that can be selected in the TRACK menu and their parameters are listed below. Tip! If you selected one track of a pair of tracks as the copy destination. • EXECUTE Execute the command. To do so. the track name will return to the “-NO REC-” display. With this setting. all virtual tracks currently selected for tracks 1–16 will be selected for the operation. For the Erase command. G COPY Copy the audio data of a track to another track. TRACK (from track) • TO TRACK Select the two tracks that will be exchanged.TR (all virtual tracks) Select whether all virtual tracks included in the corresponding track(s) will be erased (YES) or whether only the currently selected virtual track will be erased (NO).TRACK (from track) Select the copy source track.EDIT screen I TRACK menu commands and parameters The TRACK menu allows you to select a track (or virtual track) and edit all of the audio data of the track together. the same content will be copied to both of the paired tracks. • FR. rotate the [DATA/JOG] dial all the way clockwise when setting the TRACK parameter. • NAME Access the NAME EDIT popup window. • EXECUTE Execute the command. After this command is executed. all regions included in the track will be combined into a single region. G ERASE Erase the audio data of a track. Move the cursor to the OK button of the NAME EDIT popup window. and input the new name. For TO TRACK. you can specify all tracks as the subject of the operation. For the Slip command. • RATIO Specify the compression/expansion ratio in units of 0. • EXECUTE Execute the command. • TO TRACK Select the copy destination track. • ALL V. • TRACK Select the track that you wish to compress or expand. G SLIP Shift the audio data of the entire track forward or backward. • ALL V. G T-COMP (time compression/expansion) Compress or expand the length of the track in a range of 50%–200% without affecting the pitch. rotate the [DATA/JOG] dial all the way clockwise when setting the TRACK parameter. G EXCHG (exchange) Exchange the audio data of two tracks.TR (all virtual tracks) Select whether all virtual tracks included in the two tracks will be exchanged (YES) or whether only the currently selected virtual tracks will be exchanged (NO). it is also possible to select an unrecorded track. you can specify all tracks as the subject of the operation. • EXECUTE Execute the command. — Reference Guide 101 . G NAME (track name) Edit the name of an already-recorded track. to make the selection read “AL-C” (ALL-CURRENT). In the TRACK menu. and press the [ENTER] key to finalize the new name.

the START¡END portion of the virtual tracks currently selected for tracks 1–16 will be selected for the operation. If all audio data in a track is erased. START END A DELETE B A’ B 102 — Reference Guide . • END Specify the ending location of the part to be deleted. • START Specify the starting location of the part to be erased. A ERASE B A G DELETE A’ B Tip! Immediately after executing an editing command of the TRACK menu (except for the NAME command). rotate the [DATA/JOG] dial all the way clockwise when setting the TRACK parameter.TR (all virtual tracks) Select whether data will be erased from all virtual tracks included in the selected track(s) (YES) or only from the currently selected virtual track (NO).EDIT screen G PITCH (pitch change) Modify the pitch of the entire track without changing the length of the audio. it is not possible to cancel the command after it has been executed.TR (all virtual tracks) Select whether data will be deleted from all virtual tracks included in the selected track(s) (YES) or only from the currently selected virtual track (NO). G ERASE Erase the audio data from the selected part. With this setting. you can specify all tracks as the subject of the operation. all regions included in the track will be combined into a single region. • START Specify the starting location of the part to be deleted. I PART menu commands and parameters The PART menu allows you to specify an area (“part”) of the selected track. For the Delete command. • PITCH Adjust the amount of pitch change in semitone units (range: ±12 semitones). To do so. you can press the [UNDO] key to return the data to its previous condition. rotate the [DATA/JOG] dial all the way clockwise when setting the TRACK parameter. After this command is executed. For the Erase command. • ALL V. An area that contains no audio data cannot be specified as a part. Subsequent audio data will be moved forward by the length of the deleted part. START END Executing the T-COMP or PITCH commands will require more processing time than the actual length of the audio. • FINE Adjust the amount of pitch change in one-cent units (range: ±50 cents). The commands that can be selected in the PART menu and their parameters are listed below. you can specify all tracks as the subject of the operation. • EXECUTE Execute the command. • EXECUTE Execute the command. • TRACK Select the track from which you wish to delete data. • EXECUTE Execute the command. Also. • ALL V. • TRACK Select the track from which you wish to erase data. to make the selection read “AL-C” (ALL-CURRENT). • END Specify the ending location of the part to be erased. to make the selection read “AL-C” (ALL-CURRENT). the track name will return to the “-NO REC-” display. With this setting. • TRACK Select the track whose pitch you wish to modify. the START¡END range of the virtual tracks currently selected for tracks 1–16 will be selected for the operation. Delete the audio data from the selected part. To do so. and execute an editing command.

TRACK (from track) Select the move source track. • TO TRACK Select the move destination track. TRACK) Move destination track (TO TRACK) FR. START (from start) Specify the starting location of the copy source part.START Move source track (FR. • FR. START (from start) Specify the starting location of the move source part. • INTERVAL When copying multiple times. • TO TRACK Select the copy destination track. • ALL V. • FR. • TO START Specify the starting location of the move destination. specify the spacing of the copy destination starting locations. • TO START Specify the starting location of the copy destination. • EXECUTE Execute the command. • EXECUTE Execute the command. END (from end) Specify the ending location of the copy source part. • FR.EDIT screen G COPY Copy the audio data of the selected part to the specified location of the specified track. TRACK) Copy destination track (TO TRACK) FR.END A MOVE A COPY B TO START C B TO START COPY C Move destination track after execution MOVE B A’ INSERT= Insert B C Copy destination track after execution Copy destination track after execution Copy destination track after execution B A’ INSERT= Insert B C Move destination track after execution B A’ INSERT= OverWrite C B A’ INSERT= OverWrite C B TIMES= 2 A’ INTERVAL A’ — Reference Guide 103 . At this time. • FR. • INSERT Specify whether the moved audio data will be inserted (Insert) or overwritten (OverWrite) in the move destination track. • FR. FR.TR (all virtual tracks) Select whether all virtual tracks included in the corresponding track(s) will be moved (YES) or whether only the currently selected virtual track will be moved (NO). • INSERT Specify whether the copied audio data will be inserted (Insert) or overwritten (OverWrite) in the copy destination track. the move source audio data will be erased. TRACK (from track) Select the copy source track. END (from end) Specify the ending location of the move source part. FR.START Copy source track (FR. • FR.END G MOVE Move the audio data of the selected part to the specified location of the specified track. • TIMES Specify the number of times (1–99) that the data will be copied.TR (all virtual tracks) Select whether all virtual tracks included in the corresponding track(s) will be copied (YES) or whether only the currently selected virtual track will be copied (NO). • ALL V.

START END T-COMP (time compression) (50%) START START END END A INSERT B T-COMP (time expansion) (150%) A A’ B 104 — Reference Guide . • END Specify the ending location of the part into which silence will be inserted. • EXECUTE Execute the command. For the Insert command. the START¡END portion of the virtual tracks currently selected for tracks 1–16 will be selected for the operation.TR (all virtual tracks) Select whether silence will be inserted into all virtual tracks included in the selected track(s) (YES) or only into the currently selected virtual track (NO). • END Specify the ending location of the part that you wish to compress/expand.EDIT screen G INSERT Insert a length of silence into the selected part. • RATIO Specify the compression/expansion ratio in units of 0. rotate the [DATA/JOG] dial all the way clockwise when setting the TRACK parameter. you can specify all tracks as the subject of the operation. • START Specify the starting location of the part that you wish to compress/expand. With this setting. • ALL V.01% (range: 50–200%). • EXECUTE Execute the command. G T-COMP (time compression/expansion) Compress or expand the length of the selected part in a range of 50%–200% without affecting the pitch. To do so. • TRACK Select the track that you wish to compress/ expand. to make the selection read “AL-C” (ALL-CURRENT). • START Specify the starting location of the part into which silence will be inserted. Subsequent audio data will be moved backward by the length of the inserted silence. • TRACK Select the track into which you wish to insert silence.

the move source region will be erased. • REGION Select the region that you wish to move. • REGION Select the region that you wish to copy. I REGION menu commands and parameters In the REGION menu you can specify a region (a continuous piece of audio data that was recorded in a single operation) in the selected track. • NAME Access the NAME EDIT popup window. • EXECUTE Execute the command. G COPY Copy the selected region to the specified location of the specified track. At this time. • INSERT Specify whether the copied data will be inserted (Insert) or overwritten (OverWrite) in the copy destination track. • TO START Specify the starting location of the copy destination. Subsequent audio data will be moved forward by the length of the deleted region. G DELETE Delete the selected region. • REGION Select the region that will be erased. If all regions are erased from a track. • EXECUTE Execute the command.EDIT screen G PITCH (pitch change) Modify the pitch of the selected part without changing the length of the audio. and execute an editing command. • END Specify the ending location of the part whose pitch you wish to modify. • EXECUTE Execute the command. Move the cursor to the OK button of the NAME EDIT popup window. it is not possible to cancel the command after it has been executed. • FINE Adjust the amount of pitch change in one-cent units (range: ±50 cents). • REGION Select the region that will be deleted. • TO TRACK Select the move destination track. Tip! For the commands of the REGION menu. G MOVE Move the selected region to the specified location of the specified track. Tip! Immediately after executing any editing command of the PART menu you can press the [UNDO] key to return the data to its previous condition. • START Specify the starting location of the part whose pitch you wish to modify. • TIMES Specify the number of times (1–99) that the data will be copied. • INTERVAL When copying multiple times. specify the spacing of the copy destination starting locations. G NAME Modify the name of a region. • REGION Select the region whose name you wish to modify. it is not possible to select only part of the region for editing. and input the new name. The commands that can be selected in the REGION menu and their parameters are listed below. and press the [ENTER] key to finalize the new name. the track name will return to the “-NO REC-” display. you must either use the PART menu. — Reference Guide 105 . • TRACK Select the track whose pitch you wish to modify. Also. • TO TRACK Select the copy destination track. • TO START Specify the starting location of the move destination. If you wish to do this. • EXECUTE Execute the command. or use the DIVIDE command to divide the region. Executing the T-COMP or PITCH commands will require more processing time than the actual length of the audio. G ERASE Erase the selected region. • PITCH Adjust the amount of pitch change in semitone units (range: ±12 semitones).

Tip! Immediately after executing an editing command of the REGION menu (except for the NAME command).01% (range: 50–200%). • TRIM IN Specify the amount of trimming in units of a sample. • REGION Select the region that you wish to trim. • EXECUTE Execute the command. • PITCH Adjust the amount of pitch change in semitone units (range: ±12 semitones). G DIVIDE Divide the selected region into two regions at the specified point. G TRIM OUT Trim the ending location of the selected region toward the beginning of the song in units of a sample. • FINE Adjust the amount of pitch change in one-cent units (range: ±50 cents). • REGION Select the region that you wish to trim. you can press the [UNDO] key to return the data to its previous condition. • RATIO Specify the compression/expansion ratio in units of 0. it is not possible to cancel the command after it has been executed. Also. • REGION Select the region that you wish to divide.EDIT screen • INSERT Specify whether the moved audio data will be inserted (Insert) or overwritten (OverWrite) in the move destination track. Executing the T-COMP or PITCH commands will require more processing time than the actual length of the audio. • EXECUTE Execute the command. • TRIM OUT Specify the amount of trimming in units of a sample. G T-COMP (time compression/expansion) Compress or expand the length of the selected region in a range of 50%–200% without affecting the pitch. • REGION Select the region whose pitch you wish to modify. G TRIM IN Trim the starting location of the selected region toward the end of the song in units of a sample. • EXECUTE Execute the command. • EXECUTE Execute the command. 106 — Reference Guide . • REGION Select the region that you wish to compress or expand. G PITCH (pitch change) Modify the pitch of the selected region without changing the length of the audio data. • EXECUTE Execute the command. • EXECUTE Execute the command. • DIVIDE Specify the location at which the region will be divided.

A name of up to 16 characters can be assigned to a virtual track. 1 2 3 [Mouse operation] M button ¡ RECORDER EDIT button ¡ V. The virtual track currently used by the track 3 is indicated by a “C” (Current) symbol at the left of this column. PART menu. G Track view In this area. For the commands that can be selected in each menu and their parameters. refer to Operation Guide “Chapter 9. TR Edit tab 7 [Screen functions] A TRACK menu B PART menu C REGION menu These are the same as the TR Edit page TRACK menu. TR Edit page is displayed. TR Edit page it is not possible to select all tracks for editing. D Track number Move the cursor to this area and use the [DATA/ JOG] dial to select the track number that contains the virtual track you wish to edit. Track/virtual track operations. — Reference Guide 107 . H Parameter area In this area you can set the required parameters for executing the edit command. In the V.” E V (virtual track number) This column shows the virtual track numbers 1– 8. For details refer to the explanation that begins on page 99. 5 4 6 8 [Key operation] • [EDIT] key ¡ [F2] (V. with the difference that the editing will apply to virtual tracks 1–8 of the same track. the regions included in each virtual track are displayed as a bar graph. TR Edit) key • Repeatedly press the RECORDER [EDIT] key until the screen shown at the right appears. The keys of the transport section will have no effect while the V. Tip! For the track editing procedure. y=virtual track number 1–8). this display is the same as in the TR Edit page.TR Edit page Edit virtual tracks [Function] Edit the virtual tracks 1–8 included in the specified track. F NAME This column shows the names of virtual tracks 1–8. refer to page 99 and following.EDIT screen V. Virtual tracks on which nothing has been recorded are displayed as “-NO REC-”. With the exception that virtual tracks 1–8 of the same track are displayed simultaneously. and REGION menu. Virtual tracks that have already been recorded are assigned a default name of “V. but only the first eight characters will be displayed in this column.Tr xy” (x=track number 1–16.

TR Edit page. you can press the [SHIFT] key to assign the following additional functions to the [F1]–[F3] keys. F1 F2 F3 • [F1] (REMAIN) key • [F2] (X-ZOOM IN) key • [F3] (X-ZOOM OUT) key These are the same as the additional functions of the TR Edit page. 108 — Reference Guide .EDIT screen I Additional functions in the V.TR Edit page In the V.

If “Insert” is selected. the track number will always be selected as an odd-numbered/even-numbered pair. G EXECUTE button This button executes the CD-DA import operation. and use the [DATA/JOG] dial to set START (start point) and END (end point). Since the CD-DA audio data is imported in stereo. C Destination point Specify the point in the track at which the imported CD-DA data will be placed.EDIT screen CD Import page Import CD-DA to an audio track [Function] Import CD-DA (CD audio) data from an audio CD/mixed-mode CD-ROM inserted in the internal or external CD-RW drive. any subsequent audio data in the import destination track will be moved toward the end of the song by the length of the inserted audio data. 1 2 3 4 6 7 [Key operation] • [EDIT] key ¡ [F3] (CD Import) key • Repeatedly press the [EDIT] key until the screen shown at the right appears.” Move the cursor to this area. F EXTRACT POINT From the track selected in 5. B PASTE TO Select the track number and virtual track number of the destination track in which the CD-DA data will be placed. Tip! The units used to specify this point will change depending on the counter display method (time/units/measures) selected in the SONG screen Setting page. D TYPE Select whether the imported CD-DA data will be inserted into the track (Insert) or overwritten (OverWrite). Move the cursor to this list and rotate the [DATA/JOG] dial to select the import source track. — Reference Guide 109 . specify the area that will be imported in units of “minutes:seconds:frames (1/75 second). If measure display is selected. and assign it to the desired audio track. “measures” will be the smallest settable unit. 5 [Mouse operation] M button ¡ RECORDER EDIT button ¡ CD Import tab [Screen functions] A DRIVE Move the cursor to this area and rotate the [DATA/JOG] dial to select the internal or external CD-RW drive. E TRACK/TOTAL This is the track list of the audio CD/mixedmode CD-ROM inserted in the CD-RW drive.

Also. 7. and press the [ENTER] key. The CD-DA import will be executed.2 page. Place the audio CD or mixed-mode CDROM on the tray. • [F1] (CD LOAD) key Close the tray of the CD-RW drive. execution of the operation cannot be halted once it has begun. use the [DATA/JOG] dial to select the SCSI ID of the CD-RW drive. If the current song has a sampling frequency of 48 kHz. • CD-DA data can be imported only into songs whose sampling frequency is 44. and press the [SHIFT] key + [F1] (CD LOAD) key. 3. and after reading the warning regarding copyright. and use the [DATA/JOG] dial to specify the location in the track where the CDDA audio data will be placed. Select “Insert” if you want the CD-DA audio data to be inserted into the track.1 kHz. a message of “Current Song is 48 (kHz) Fs Type” will appear. 4. In this page. and the L/R channels of the CD-DA data will be assigned to these tracks. • [F2] (CD UNLOAD) key Eject the tray of the CD-RW drive. Access the EDIT screen CD Import page. G Importing CD-DA data into a track [Procedure] 1. access the UTILITY screen Prefer. 1–1/2–1. and press the [SHIFT] key + [F2] (CD UNLOAD) key. Move the cursor to the OK button and press the [ENTER] key. or “OverWrite” if you want the data to be overwritten onto the track. and use the [DATA/JOG] dial to specify the track number and virtual track number of the track in which the CD-DA data will be placed. • The keys of the transport section will have no effect while the CD Import page is displayed. move the cursor to the EXECUTE button and press the [ENTER] key. 6. Execution of this operation will require more time than the actual data length. and this page cannot be used. Move the cursor to the TYPE area. 2. switch the CD/DAT DIGITAL REC “DISABLE” button to “ENABLE. To execute the Import operation. and the disc will be inserted.. identically-numbered virtual tracks of adjacent odd-numbered/even-numbered tracks will be selected (e. 110 — Reference Guide . A message will ask you to confirm.g. The CD-RW drive tray will be ejected. Move the cursor to the DRIVE area. and a screen like the following will appear. The CD-RW drive tray will close. Move the cursor to PASTE TO. 8. 1–2/2–2). If a “Prohibit CD Import!” message is displayed and the import cannot be executed. Move the cursor to the destination point area. F1 F2 5.EDIT screen The AW4416 will detect the inserted CD.” I Additional functions in the CD Import page In the CD Import page you can press the [SHIFT] key to assign the following additional functions to the [F1]–[F2] keys.

2 3 4 5 [Mouse operation] M button ¡ RECORDER EDIT button ¡ WavImport tab 6 7 [Screen functions] A DRIVE Move the cursor to this area and rotate the [DATA/JOG] dial to select the internal CD-RW drive or external SCSI device. and files indicate directories. For example this will indicate “/” if you are in the highest level (root directory). D TYPE Select whether the imported WAV file will be inserted into the track (Insert) or overwritten (OverWrite). G TOTAL The playback time of the WAV file is displayed in hours/minutes/seconds/milliseconds. icons indicate WAV files. — Reference Guide 111 . If a stereo WAV file is selected. B PASTE TO Select the track number (1–16 and virtual track number (1–8) of the track into which you wish to import the WAV file. If “Insert” is selected. Other files will not be displayed in the list. and have a filename extension of “. 1 [Key operation] • [EDIT] key ¡ [F4] (WavImport) key • Repeatedly press the RECORDER [EDIT] key until the screen shown at the right appears. Tip! The units used to specify this point will change depending on the counter display method (time/units/measures) selected in the SONG screen Setting page. G TYPE The stereo ( )/monaural ( ) status of the WAV file and its quantization (word length) is displayed. and assign it to a track. “measures” will be the smallest settable unit. C Destination point Specify the point in the track at which the WAV file will be placed. E File list This shows a list of the WAV files on the internal CD-RW drive or external SCSI device. If measure display is selected. F DIR (directory) The “/” symbol and the directory name indicate the directory in which the list shown in 5 is located. This list contains the following information. The AW4416 can recognize only WAV files that have the same sampling frequency as the current song.WAV” following their name. The NAME field shows the track name of the selected track. or “/ WAV/” if you are in a directory named WAV located one level lower. G FILE The file name/directory name is displayed.EDIT screen WavImport page Import a WAV file to an audio track [Function] Import a WAV format audio file from a CD-ROM or CD-ROM/MO disk inserted in the internal CDRW drive or an external SCSI device. any subsequent audio data in the import destination track will be moved toward the end of the song by the length of the inserted WAV file. two adjacent odd-numbered ¡ even-numbered tracks will be displayed.

and press the [ENTER] key. identically-numbered virtual tracks for a pair of adjacent odd-numbered ¡ even-numbered tracks (e. Move the cursor to the OK button and press the [ENTER] key. I Additional functions in the Wav Import page In the Wav Import page you can press the [SHIFT] key to assign the following additional functions to the [F1]–[F2] keys. Insert the media containing the WAV file into an external SCSI device (e. 9. 7. MO drive) or the internal CD-RW drive.EDIT screen G EXECUTE button This button executes the WAV file import. G Importing a WAV file to a track [Procedure] 1. The keys of the transport section will have no effect when the WavImport page is displayed. Tip! If you select a stereo WAV file in step 4. or to “OverWrite” if you wish to overwrite the WAV file onto the track. MO disk etc. 5. Also.g. F1 F2 • [F1] (CD LOAD) key Close the tray of the CD-RW drive. Set the TYPE parameter to “Insert” if you wish to insert the WAV file into the track. The AW4416 will recognize the WAV files on the inserted media (CD-ROM. Move the cursor to the location point area below PASTE TO. 8.. The WAV file import will be executed. use the [DATA/JOG] dial to select the SCSI ID of the drive. To execute the WAV file import. and use the [DATA/JOG] dial to select the WAV file that you wish to import. and will display a list like the following. 112 — Reference Guide . 1–2/2–2) will be selected. Move the cursor to the DRIVE area. Access the EDIT screen WavImport page. A popup window will ask you for confirmation. • [F2] (CD UNLOAD) key Eject the tray of the CD-RW drive. and use the [DATA/JOG] dial to specify the location in the track where the WAV file will be placed. 1–1/2–1.. Execution of this operation requires a longer time than the actual time length of the data. To return to the next highest directory.). 4. move the cursor to the EXECUTE button and press the [ENTER] key. move the cursor to and press the [ENTER] key. The file enclosed by the dotted lines in the center of the list is selected for the operation. 6. and the L/R channels of the WAV file will be assigned to these tracks. 3. and use the [DATA/JOG] dial to select the track number (1–16) and virtual track number (1–8) of the track in which the WAV file will be placed. and indicates the directory above. 2. Move the cursor to the PASTE TO area. processing cannot be cancelled once the operation has been executed. Tip! indicates the current directory. Move the cursor to the file list.g.

.... E TRACK CLIP button The current song will be displayed with the most recently saved content.... Only a song with the same quantization and sampling rate as the current song can be selected as the import source.... TRACK (destination track) Specify the track number (1–16) and virtual track number (1–8) for the import destination track.. SONG NAME...... Date and time at which the song was last saved • SIZE ............ — Reference Guide 113 . C DEST....... select the track number (1–16) and virtual track number (1–8) of the track that you wish to import.... When you move the cursor to this button and press the [ENTER] key.... The current song will be highlighted in the list. the track selected in SOURCE TRACK 3 will be registered as the import source... D LOAD button When you move the cursor to this button and press the [ENTER] key.. 1 [Mouse operation] M button ¡ RECORDER EDIT button ¡ TR Import tab 2 3 4 5 6 [Screen functions] A Song list This lists the songs that are saved on the internal hard disk..... The list shows the following information.. B SOURCE TRACK From the song selected in the song list 1.. • The track name is not included in the data that is imported........ The name of the selected track is displayed at the right...... This button will be valid only after you have used the LOAD button 4 to load the track information for the song..... Song quantization and sampling rate • PRT ... The current song cannot be selected... Song data size (including audio data) • BIT/FS . This display will appear only after you have used the TRACK CLIP button 5 to register the desired track from the import source song... [Key operation] • [EDIT] key ¡ [F5] (TR Import) key • Repeatedly press the RECORDER [EDIT] key until the screen shown at the right appears. The name of the selected track is displayed at the right...EDIT screen TR Import page Import a track from an existing song [Function] Import a track from a song on the hard disk into the desired track of the current song. Song name • SAVED AT. track information for the song selected in the track list will be loaded.... Song protect on/off • This parameter will be valid only after you have used the LOAD button 4 to load the track information for the selected song.. and use the [DATA/JOG] dial to select the import source song... • DEST... Move the cursor to this list.....

• This button will be valid only after you have used the TRACK CLIP button 5 to register the import source track. Move the cursor to the upper part of the display. Move the cursor to the DEST. Move the cursor to the EXECUTE button and press the [ENTER] key. A confirmation popup window will appear. G Importing a track from an existing song [Procedure] 1. A confirmation popup window will appear. and the display will change as follows. and select the track number (1–16) and virtual track number (1–8) of the track that you wish to import. 9. 5. TRACK field.Move the cursor to the OK button and press the [ENTER] key. 6. you can return the data to the state before importing. 114 — Reference Guide . 10. and use the [DATA/JOG] dial to select the song from which a track will be imported. The track selected in the SOURCE TRACK field will be selected as the import source. When you use the TRACK CLIP button to register the import source track. select the OK button and you will return to the state of step 2.EDIT screen F EXECUTE button This button executes the track import operation. A confirmation popup window will appear. all the contents of the corresponding track will be erased and replaced by the contents of the imported track. move the cursor to the song list in the upper part of the display. and specify the track number (1–16) and virtual track number (1–8) of the import destination track. Move the cursor to the LOAD button and press the [ENTER] key.” below. If you select an already-recorded virtual track as the import destination. and rotate the [DATA/JOG] dial. Access the EDIT screen TR Import page. refer to “Importing a track from an existing song. Move the cursor to the TRACK CLIP button and press the [ENTER] key. 7. For the procedure of importing a track. it will no longer be possible to change the track in the SOURCE TRACK field. 3. If you wish to change the import source track. 8. Move the cursor to the OK button and press the [ENTER] key. • The keys of the transport section will have no effect in the TR Import page. Tip! By pressing the [UNDO] key immediately after you execute the import. Move the cursor to the SOURCE TRACK field. 4. 2. The track will be imported into the current song. In the confirmation popup window that appears. The track information will be read from the selected song. Move the cursor to the OK button and press the [ENTER] key. and the display will change as follows.

G END If this button is on. the value at which fader editing ended will be maintained until the next time the fader changes. If you leave the RET button turned on. 1 2 3 [Key operation] • [AUTO MIX] key ¡ [F1] (Main) key • Repeatedly press the [AUTO MIX] key until the screen shown at the right appears. B FREE This shows the free area of automix memory in kilobytes and as a percentage. D FADER EDIT OUT This setting specifies how the fader and other parameter values will change when automix recording ends. and contains the automix data prior to the last operation. which is convenient when you are editing only a portion of the fader operations. Tip! The undo buffer is dedicated memory for automix undo.AUTOMIX screen Main page Make basic automix settings [Function] Make basic settings for recording and playing automix.” automix recording or playback will begin automatically when the song is started. ¡ P. all subsequent recorded events of the same parameter will be erased when you finish editing fader or other parameter data. C SIZE This shows the sizes in kilobytes of the current automix and of the undo buffer. the fader will return to the previously-recorded value when you finish editing fader data. the fader will automatically return to the previous location when editing ends. (The time over which it returns to the original value can be set in the Fader Edit page. • If you want the fader locations at which editing ended to be maintained to the end of the automix.121) If this button is off. 4 6 J 5 7 9 8 [Mouse operation] M button ¡ AMIX button ¡ Main tab [Screen functions] A AUTOMIX Turn automix on (ENABLE) or off (DISABLE). If this button is set to “ENABLE. G RET If this button is on. it is convenient to turn on the END button. — Reference Guide 115 AUTO MIX . Tip! • The AW4416 remembers the previouslyrecorded fader movements even when you are editing fader operations.

This is convenient when you wish to add relative changes to the previously-recorded fader movements. G FADER Fader operations of each channel G CH ON [ON] key operations of each channel G PAN Pan operations of each channel G EQ EQ operations of each channel F FADER EDIT MODE Select one of the following two ways in which fader movements recorded in automix will be edited. G ABSOLUTE This is the usual mode. G RELATIVE In this mode. the previously-recorded fader operation events are combined with the new events and recorded.AUTOMIX screen When END= on Previously-recorded fader movement Fader movement after editing RET= on RET= off Edited fader movement When RET= on. 116 — Reference Guide . END= off Previously-recorded fader movement Fader movement after editing Edited fader movement E OVERWRITE Switch recording on/off for each parameter. Each button corresponds to the following parameters. in which previouslyrecorded fader events are erased and the new events recorded. END= off Previously-recorded fader movement Fader movement after editing Edited fader movement When RET= off.

a popup window will ask whether you wish to discard the automix. If you turn on this button while recording automix.AUTOMIX screen Fader Edit Mode= RELATIVE RET= on Fader movement before editing Fader movement after editing Fader movement edited in RELATIVE mode Fader Edit Mode= RELATIVE RET= off Fader movement before editing END= off Fader movement after editing Fader movement edited in RELATIVE mode Fader Edit Mode= RELATIVE RET= off Fader movement before editing END= on Fader movement after editing Fader movement edited in RELATIVE mode G NEW MIX button When you move the cursor to this button and press the [ENTER] key. — Reference Guide 117 . By moving the cursor and pressing the [ENTER] key you can perform the corresponding operation. there is no current automix. These buttons have the following functions. You must first create a new automix before you can operate the automix. G ABORT This button stops automix recording and discards the changes.) H UNDO When you move the cursor to this button and press the [ENTER] key. (However. the current automix will be erased. and a new automix will be created. the content that was lastrecorded in the automix will be erased. returning the automix to its previous state. the undo buffer will be erased. J AUTOMIX TRANSPORT These buttons control automix recording and playback. I CLR. you can try using this button. Tip! When a song is in its initial state. For example if the current automix is too large to be stored in memory.BUF (clear buffer) button When you move the cursor to this button and press the [ENTER] key. the data prior to the most recent operation will be lost.

Automix. move the cursor to this button and press the [ENTER] key. Tip! For the procedure of recording and playing automix. However. This is the same function as the ABORT button. F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 • [F1] (ABORT) key Stop automix recording and discard the changes. refer to Operation Guide “Chapter 14. When automix is playing. • When the REC button is blinking. turning this button on will cause the button to blink and recordready mode to be selected. This is the same function as the PLAY button. this differs from the REC button in that this button will not turn off automatically when recording ends.AUTOMIX screen G STOP button This button stops automix recording or playback. you can punch-in by moving the cursor to the PLAY button and pressing the [ENTER] key. If you turn on this button while recording automix. This is the same function as the STOP button. you can use this button in conjunction with the REC button to punch-in. • [F2] (STOP) key Stop recording or playing automix. • [F3] (PLAY) key Execute punch-in when the REC (record) button is blinking. This is the same function as the REC (record) button. • [F4] (REC) key Record or punch-in automix. and automix recording/playback will begin. this button can be used in conjunction with the PLAY button to punch-in. While automix is playing. this button will automatically be turned on. If you wish to turn it back off. • [F5] (AUTO REC) key Automatically record automix. This is the same function as the AUTO REC (auto record) button. starting playback on the recorder will cause automix recording to begin. a popup window will ask whether you wish to update the data.” 118 — Reference Guide . and when recording ends the REC button will also turn off automatically. I Additional functions in the Main page In the Main page you can press the [SHIFT] key to assign the following functions to the [F1]–[F5] keys. • Automix will not start even if you move the cursor to the on-screen PLAY button and press the [ENTER] key. G AUTO REC button If you turn this button on (lit) and play back the recorder. G REC (record) button When automix is stopped. automix recording will begin. In this state. G PLAY button If the recorder is started with the ENABLE button turned on.

1 2 3 J L O 7 8 9 K M N [Mouse operation] M button ¡ AMIX button ¡ Memory tab [Screen functions] A TITLE EDIT button Use this to edit the name (memory title) of an automix stored in memory. the current automix will be erased. F MEMORY TITLE This column shows the names of the automixes stored in memory. This shows the free area of automix memory in kilobytes. E No. you can use the [DATA/JOG] dial to select automix data regardless of where the cursor is located. 45 6 [Key operation] • [AUTO MIX] key ¡ [F2] (Memory) key • Repeatedly press the [AUTO MIX] key until the screen shown at the right appears. (number) This column shows the memory number 1–16.60. You can select an automix number 1– 16 as the store destination. For details on inputting characters. allowing you to input a name. refer to Operation Guide P. C STORE button This button stores the current automix data into memory. — Reference Guide 119 . and recall will not be possible. H CLEAR button Erase the automix data that is currently selected in the memory list. If you select an automix number in which nothing has been stored and attempt to recall it. B RECALL button Recall the currently selected automix from the list. and a new automix will be created. I SIZE When you execute the Store operation. In this page. Automix numbers in which nothing has been stored will be displayed as “No Data!” G NEW MIX button When you move the cursor to this button and press the [ENTER] key. When you move the cursor to the TITLE EDIT button and press the [ENTER] key. A maximum of 16 characters can be input. D Selected memory Store/recall operations will apply to the automix data enclosed by the dotted line in the memory list.AUTOMIX screen Memory page Store or recall automix [Function] Store or recall automix data to/ from memory. the automix data that had previously been stored in that number will be erased. an error message of “CANNOT RECALL AUTOMIX” will appear. the TITLE EDIT popup window will appear.

AUTOMIX screen J AUTOMIX K OVERWRITE L EDIT OUT M UNDO button N CLR. 120 — Reference Guide . • [F3] (STORE) key Store the current automix data. • [F2] (RECALL) key Recall the automix that is currently selected by the cursor in the list. This is the same function as the 1 TITLE EDIT button. This is the same function as the 2 RECALL button. • [F1] (TITLE EDIT) key Use this to edit the name (memory title) of automix data saved in memory. This is the same function as the 3 STORE button. Refer to the explanation on page 115. F1 F2 F3 I Additional functions in the Memory page In the Memory page you can press the [SHIFT] key to assign the following functions to the [F1]–[F3] keys. BUF (clear buffer) button O AUTOMIX TRANSPORT These are the same functions as described in the Main page.

AUTOMIX screen

Fader Edit page
View fader events as a bar graph
[Function]
View a bar graph representation of the fader operation events recorded in the automix.

[Key operation]
• [AUTO MIX] key ¡ [F3] (Fader Edit) key • Repeatedly press the [AUTO MIX] key until the screen shown at the right appears.

1 2 4 3

[Mouse operation]
M button ¡ AMIX button ¡ Fader Edit tab

[Screen functions]
A Bar graph
This area shows the fader position of each channel as a bar graph. (Use the keys of the MIXING LAYER section to select the channels that are displayed.) For the fader being edited, both the previously-recorded position and the edited position are displayed, as shown in the following diagram. At this time, the arrow displayed beside the bar graph indicates the direction in which you can move the fader to return it to the previous position.
Previously-recorded fader position Current fader position

which the faders will return to their original values after fader editing is ended.

C FADER EDIT MODE D AUTOMIX TRANSPORT
These are the same functions as in the Main page. Refer to the explanation on page 115.

I Additional functions in the Fader Edit page
In the Fader Edit page you can press the [SHIFT] key to assign the following functions to the [F1]– [F5] keys.

F1

F2

F3

F4

F5

Current fader position

Previously-recorded fader position

• [F1] (ABORT) key • [F2] (STOP) key • [F4] (REC) key • [F5] (AUTO REC) key
These are identical to the additional functions of the Main page.

(1) If the fader is lower than previously recorded

(2) If the fader is higher than • [F3] (PLAY) key previously recorded

B FADER EDIT OUT
These are the same functions as the END/RET buttons of the Main page. Refer to the explanation on page 115. If the RET button is on, the knob located at the right sets the time over

— Reference Guide

121

AUTOMIX screen

Event List page
Edit events off-line
[Function]
Perform off-line editing of the scene/library recall, channel on/ off, pan, and fade operations recorded in the automix.

1

[Key operation]
• [AUTO MIX] key ¡ [F4] (Event List) key • Repeatedly press the [AUTO MIX] key until the screen shown at the right appears.

7 8 9 2 3

[Mouse operation]
M button ¡ AMIX button ¡ Event List tab

This page cannot be operated while automix is being played or recorded. Also, if automix playback or recording is started when this page is displayed, the display will automatically change to the AUTOMIX screen Main page.

4

5

6

[Screen functions]
A Event list select buttons
Of the events recorded in automix, these buttons select the type of automix events that will be displayed in the event list. Move the cursor to one of the four buttons, and press the [ENTER] key to select the type of events. Each button corresponds to the following events. G SCENE/LIB (scene/library) button Scene memory and library recall events will be displayed. The following types of events will be displayed. • SCENE .......... Scene memory recall events. The numeric value indicates the scene number. • EQ. Lib. ........ EQ library recall events. The numeric value indicates the EQ library number. • DY. Lib. ......... Dynamics library recall events. The numeric value indicates the dynamics library number. • EF. Lib. ...........Effect library recall events. The numeric value indicates the effect library number. • CH. Lib. .........Channel library recall events. The numeric value indicates the channel library number. G CH ON (channel on) button On/off events of each channel will be displayed. G PAN button Pan operation events of each channel will be displayed. G FADER button Fader operation events of each channel will be displayed.

B Event selection cursor
Move the cursor to this area and rotate the [DATA/JOG] dial to select the data that you wish to edit.

122

— Reference Guide

AUTOMIX screen C Selected event
Editing will apply to the event that is enclosed by a dotted line in the list. Move the cursor to the parameter that you wish to edit, and rotate the [DATA/JOG] dial to edit the value.

D TIME
This area shows the time at which the event is recorded, as hours/minutes/seconds/milliseconds. (The minimum unit is 25 milliseconds.) You can move the cursor to this area and rotate the [DATA/JOG] dial to move the location of the event.

Tip!
Regardless of the display method selected in the SONG screen Setting page, the timing in the event list is always displayed as time.

If you edit the TIME the events in the list will be re-ordered automatically. This means that the displayed order of the events may change.

E EVENT
This area shows the type of each event. Move the cursor here and rotate the [DATA/JOG] dial to edit the event.

F CHANNEL
This area shows the channel of the event. Move the cursor here and rotate the [DATA/JOG] dial to change the channel.

G SELECTED CH ONLY (selected channel
only) button
If you press a [SEL] key when this button is on, only the events of that channel will be displayed.

H DUPLICATE button
When you move the cursor to this button and press the [ENTER] key, a duplicate of the selected event will be created at the same location.

I DELETE button
When you move the cursor to this button and press the [ENTER] key, the selected event will be deleted.

Tip!
For the procedure of duplicating or deleting an event, refer to Operation Guide “Chapter 14. Automix.”

— Reference Guide

123

or recall a scene that was stored in scene memory. C STORE button Store the current settings (current scene) of the AW4416 into scene memory. This is the same function as the [RECALL] key of the top panel SCENE MEMORY section. If you select a number in which nothing has been stored and attempt to recall it.SCENE screen Scene Mem page Store or recall a scene [Function] Store the current settings of the AW4416 into scene memory. 1 2 3 9 8 [Mouse operation] M button ¡ SCEN button ¡ Scene Mem tab [Screen functions] A TITLE EDIT button Use this to edit the name (library title) of a scene stored in the library. refer to page 60 of the Operation Guide. When you move the cursor to the TITLE EDIT button and press the [ENTER] key. For details on inputting characters. numbers in which no scene has been stored will be displayed as “No Data!. Also. 4 5 67 [Key operation] • [SCENE] key ¡ [F1] (Scene Mem) key • Repeatedly press the [SCENE] key until the screen shown at the right appears. and recall will not be possible. allowing you to input the name. It is not possible to change the name of scene number 0 or of a scene in which PROTECTION is turned on. the TITLE EDIT popup window will appear. B RECALL button Recall the currently selected scene from the scene list. 124 — Reference Guide .” and their title cannot be edited. This is the same function as the [STORE] key of the SCENE MEMORY section. You can input a library name of up to 16 characters. an error message of “ERROR NO DATA TO RECALL” will be displayed.

a symbol is displayed for scenes for which the PROTECTION button is on. In this page. recorder monitor channels 1–16. • When you execute the Store operation. F PRT (protect) A write-prohibit symbol is displayed in this column for recall-only scene number 0. stereo) ON key settings of all channels Attenuation settings of all channels Phase settings of all channels Mix paramEQ settings of all channels eters Pan settings of all channels Routing settings of all channels Fader group settings of all channels Pairing settings of all channels Dynamics settings of all channels Delay settings of all channels Effect Parameter settings for effects 1/2 parameters Scene name settings Other Fader recall fade time settings Patching and insert settings for external input/output F1 F2 F3 H PROTECTION Turn memory protect on/off for the scene currently selected by the cursor. • [F3] (STORE) key • Scene number 0 is recall-only. This is the same function as the 2 RECALL button.SCENE screen The following parameters are saved in memory as a scene. E LIBRARY TITLE This column displays the name assigned to each scene. This is the same function as the 1 TITLE EDIT button. indicating that they cannot be stored. effect returns 1/2. • [F2] (RECALL) key Use this to recall the scene currently selected by the cursor from the list. — Reference Guide 125 SCENE . G Selected scene Scene store/recall operations will apply to the scene enclosed by a dotted line in the library list. I Additional functions in the Scene Mem page In the Scene Mem page you can press the [SHIFT] key to assign the following functions to the [F1]– [F3] keys. In addition. you can use the [DATA/JOG] dial to select scenes regardless of where the cursor is located. I PROTECTION ON/OFF GLOBAL Turn memory protect on/off for all scene numbers 1–50/51–96. This is the same function as the 3 STORE button. Fader locations of all channels and buses (input channels 1–24. AUX send levels 1-8. the scene that had been stored in that number will be erased. D LIBRARY No. Store the current scene. (library number) This column displays the scene number 0–96. and settings cannot be stored in it. • [F1] (TITLE EDIT) key Use this to edit the name of a scene saved in the library.

1 second. move the cursor to the OK button and press the [ENTER] key. 3. 1 [Key operation] • [SCENE] key ¡ [F2] (Fade Time) key • Repeatedly press the [SCENE] key until the screen shown at the right appears. [Mouse operation] M button ¡ SCEN button ¡ Fade Time tab [Screen functions] A Fade time Specify the time (fade time) over which the faders of each channel will move their new locations when a scene is recalled.SCENE screen Fade Time page Specify the fade time [Function] Specify the time over which the faders will reach their new locations when a scene is recalled. in steps of 0. asking you to confirm the copy. Be sure to save the scene after editing the fade time. Press the [STORE] key to store the scene. G Input channels 1–24 G Monitor channels 1–16 G Effect return channels 1/2 G Stereo output channel • [F5] (COPY TO ALL) key Copy the fade time setting selected by the cursor to all other channels. 4. Fade time will have no effect unless it is specified for the scene being recalled (even if it is specified for the current scene).0 second–10 seconds). The fade time is specified independently for each scene. Press the [SHIFT] key + [F5] key. Fade time can be set for the following channels. To execute the copy. I Additional functions in the Fade Time page In the Fade Time page you can press the [SHIFT] key to assign the following additional function to the [F5] key. F5 126 — Reference Guide . In the SCENE screen Fade Time page. G Copying fade time settings to all channels [Procedure] 1. (Range: 0. A CONFIRMATION popup window will appear. move the cursor to the fade time setting of the copy source channel. 2.

the faders of the pair may be in different positions immediately after a scene is recalled. Safe tab [Screen functions] A RECALL SAFE CHANNEL If a button in this area is turned on. This means that if one channel of a pair is set to Recall Safe. 1 2 [Key operation] • [SCENE] key ¡ [F3] (RCL. moving one of the faders will cause the other fader to follow immediately. G Input channels 1–24 G Monitor channels 1–16 G Effect return channels 1/2 G Stereo output channel Tip! When a scene is recalled. Safe page Make fader recall safe settings [Function] Specify the faders that will be excluded from the recall when a scene is recalled.SCENE screen RCL. B ENABLE Move the cursor to this button and press the [ENTER] key to specify whether the Fader Recall Safe function will be enabled (ENABLE) or not (DISABLE). Fader Recall Safe is valid only if that scene was saved with the ENABLE parameter 2 set to ENABLE. the fader of the corresponding channel will maintain its current position even when a scene is recalled. — Reference Guide 127 . However even in this case. [Mouse operation] M button ¡ SCEN button ¡ RCL. The following channels can be set to Recall Safe status. Safe) key • Repeatedly press the [SCENE] key until the screen shown at the right appears. Recall Safe settings are not linked for paired channels.

(The location currently selected for insertion is displayed as “INSERTION POINT. [Key operation] • [SCENE] key ¡ [F4] (Sort) key • Repeatedly press the [SCENE] key until the screen shown at the right appears. 1 2 [Mouse operation] M button ¡ SCEN button ¡ Sort tab 3 [Screen functions] A SOURCE This list shows the current state of the scene memories. Move the cursor to this area and rotate the [DATA/JOG] dial to select the point where the scene will be inserted.”) C EXECUTE button Move the cursor to this button and press the [ENTER] key to change the order of the scenes. Move the cursor to this list. and rotate the [DATA/JOG] dial to select the scene whose sorting order you wish to change. (The currently selected scene will be highlighted. 128 — Reference Guide .) B DESTINATION Specify the scene number to which the scene selected in the SOURCE list will be moved.SCENE screen Sort page Sort scenes [Function] Sort the scenes stored in scene memory.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Popup messages . . Mixer section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Recorder section . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Effects Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Control I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Appendix Appendix Preset EQ Program Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Block diagram — Reference Guide Appendix– 1 Appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Display message list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 General Specifications . . . . . . . . . . 50 MIDI Implementation Chart . . . . 49 MIDI data format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Preset Effects Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 44 46 47 48 Dimensions . 29 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . 8 Dynamics Processors . . . . . 41 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Preset Dynamics Programs . 24 Preset Dynamics Program Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

extending the “sparkling” decay.0dB PEAKING 0. 5.5dB L.0dB PEAKING 003 Snare Drum 1 1. 16.9 1.5dB H.17kHz +3.5dB PEAKING 4.5dB PEAKING 010 E.5dB PEAKING 002 Bass Drum 2 1. producing a tight. Makes a tight electric bass sound by cutting very low frequencies.37kHz +2.5 397Hz 0.4kHz +3.1 4.2 99Hz +3.SHELF 006 Cymbal 1.00kHz +2.9kHz 0. and congas.82kHz +1.0dB PEAKING 1 2.56 2.1 111Hz +3.0dB L.52kHz +6.SHELF 009 E.3 2.2 2.0dB PEAKING 0.5dB PEAKING 5 111Hz 0.SHELF Description Emphasizes the low range of the bass drum and the attack created by the beater.0dB L.9 1.5dB PEAKING 4.2 4.5 2. 5.Bass 1 94Hz –4.00kHz +0.SHELF 008 Percussion 105Hz –2.82kHz +2. such as shakers.5dB L.28 6. emphasizing the mid to high range.SHELF 007 High Hat 177Hz +1.6kHz ON H.SHELF Emphasizes the attack and clarifies the highrange of instruments.04kHz +4.11 3.SHELF Emphasizes the attack of crash cymbals.Bass 2 0.SHELF 7.5dB PEAKING 8 420Hz 0.5dB 4.0dB PEAKING 4.05kHz 0.SHELF Unlike program 009.0dB PEAKING 0. cabasas. Appendix–2 — Reference Guide . “leathery” decay.5 420Hz –2. this emphasizes the low range of the electric bass.5 397Hz –7.0dB L. and creates a long.2 132Hz –0.05kHz 0.0dB PEAKING 2.5dB PEAKING 10 667Hz –7.5 1.4 79Hz +8.5dB PEAKING 005 Tom-tom 1 1.49kHz +2. Emphasizes the ranges of that classic rock snare drum sound. 12.0dB PEAKING 4.0dB H.00kHz 0.5dB PEAKING 0.0dB LPF Creates a peak around 80Hz.5dB PEAKING 6. HIGH H.0dB H.7 2.00kHz +4.Appendix Preset EQ Program Parameters No Name Parameter LOW PEAKING 001 Bass Drum 1 Q F G Q F G Q F G Q F G Q F G Q F G Q F G Q F G Q F G Q F G 35Hz –7.00kHz 0. 13.0dB H.35kHz +1.0dB L-MID PEAKING H-MID PEAKING 0. Emphasizes the attack of tom-toms.55kHz +0.0dB PEAKING 10 334Hz –8.0dB PEAKING 0.0dB PEAKING 0.0dB PEAKING 0.4 210Hz +2.0dB 99Hz –4.5dB PEAKING 1.33kHz +4. stiff sound.5dB 4.0dB PEAKING 5 111Hz +4.SHELF 004 Snare Drum 2 10 265Hz –3.SHELF Emphasizes snapping and rimshot sounds.SHELF Use on a tight high-hat.0dB H.24kHz +2.

18 265Hz +2.Distortion 2 94Hz –6.0dB H.65kHz +2. 4.0dB PEAKING 020 A.4 445Hz +1.0dB L.36kHz +2.5dB L.SHELF This is a variation on program 018.05kHz –8.9 3.0dB PEAKING 0.5 1.6kHz 0.5dB PEAKING 6.SHELF Description Use on a synth bass with emphasized low range.G.36kHz +3. 7.0dB H. 12. 12.3 1.5dB PEAKING 015 E.5dB PEAKING 9 5.Bass 2 1.Stroke 2 354Hz +5.5dB PEAKING 4.Distortion 1 0.5dB PEAKING 4.G.5dB PEAKING 10 397Hz –5.Bass 1 Q F G Q F G Q F G Q F G Q F G Q F G Q F G Q F G Q F G Q F G Q F G 297Hz –3.0dB H.SHELF Use for line-recording an electric guitar or semiacoustic guitar to get a slightly hard sound.0dB H.Clean 0.SHELF Emphasizes the attack that is peculiar to a synth bass.0dB H.0dB H.5dB PEAKING 0.55kHz +4.SHELF Makes a heavily distorted guitar sound clearer.7 3.SHELF 013 Piano 1 8 944Hz +8.0dB H.0dB PEAKING 10 595Hz –8.SHELF This is used to make a piano sound brighter.5dB PEAKING 012 Syn.6kHz 0.SHELF This is a variation on program 020.33kHz +0. 12.16 3.0dB L.0dB H.0dB PEAKING 2.88kHz +4.6kHz 0.0dB L-MID PEAKING H-MID PEAKING 4.0dB H.6 223Hz +3.5dB PEAKING 4 4.5dB PEAKING 0.6kHz +4.5dB L.1 83Hz +3.5dB PEAKING 017 E.0dB PEAKING 0.12kHz +1.0dB PEAKING 0.5 1.Stroke 1 0.5dB PEAKING 8 177Hz 0.SHELF Emphasize the attack and low range of the piano sound by using a compressor. Adjusts the tonal quality of a slightly distorted guitar sound.17kHz +2.0dB 5.00kHz 0.G.G.0dB PEAKING 10 1.G.5 1.Crunch 2 8 125Hz +2.5 2. — Reference Guide Appendix– 3 .5dB PEAKING 9 944Hz 0.0dB PEAKING 016 E.33kHz +4.5 4.00kHz 0.G.Appendix No Name Parameter LOW PEAKING 011 Syn.0dB 3.SHELF 021 A. 5.0dB PEAKING 8 944Hz 0.SHELF This is a variation on program 016.63 1.56kHz +2.5dB PEAKING 3.0dB PEAKING 4.SHELF 019 E.0dB PEAKING 9 749Hz –2.23kHz +4.Crunch 1 8 140Hz +4. You can also use it for the electric gut guitar.2 1. 19.SHELF Emphasizes the bright tones of an acoustic guitar.49kHz +2.00kHz 0.SHELF 018 E.0dB PEAKING 014 Piano 2 5.0kHz 0.5dB PEAKING 10 3.17kHz +1. HIGH H. 12.9 105Hz –2.G.88kHz +1.5dB 315Hz +6.6 125Hz +2.00kHz 0.33kHz +3.

5dB PEAKING 0.0dB PEAKING 0. 16.0dB PEAKING 0.6 1.5dB H-MID PEAKING 4. Use as a template for male vocal.0dB 15. Also use these programs for stereo inputs or external effect returns. With one instrument.72kHz +4.0dB H.0dB L.SHELF 032 Total EQ 3 177Hz 0.5dB H.0dB PEAKING 4. 4.5dB PEAKING 2 841Hz +1. trombones. Use as a template for a chorus.00kHz 0.99kHz +2.SHELF Use on the STEREO bus during mixdown.00kHz 0.18 118Hz –1.14 5.SHELF 022 A.00kHz 0.49kHz +3.56 2.8 749Hz +1.11 167Hz +2.49kHz +3.67kHz +1.72kHz +3.7 2.0dB PEAKING 5.28 841Hz +0.5dB PEAKING 031 Total EQ 2 7 94Hz +4. Description Corrects arpeggio technique of an acoustic guitar.0dB PEAKING 4.5dB PEAKING 5. This is a variation on program 027.5 4. Adjust the HIGH or H-MID setting according to the voice quality.8 88Hz –2.88kHz +2.0dB 17.00kHz 0.5dB PEAKING 2 841Hz +1.5dB PEAKING 0.G.16 334Hz +1.8 88Hz –2.0dB PEAKING 0.0dB H.5 1.6 2.72kHz +2.SHELF This is a variation on program 030.5dB PEAKING 026 Male Vocal 2 0.56 2.G.78kHz +2.SHELF Use as a template for female vocal.5dB PEAKING 0.Appendix No Name Parameter LOW L.00kHz +1.0dB H.0dB PEAKING 7 354Hz –5.0kHz +6.1kHz +4. Appendix–4 — Reference Guide .SHELF 023 A.5 1.11kHz +1.11 187Hz –0.0dB PEAKING 024 Brass Section 2.12 6. For more effect.SHELF This is a variation on program 022.5dB 111Hz –7.0dB PEAKING 2.0dB PEAKING 2.0dB PEAKING 0.SHELF Use with trumpets.0dB PEAKING 7 4.0dB PEAKING 0.5dB L.5dB PEAKING 0. Adjust the HIGH or H-MID setting according to the voice quality.0dB PEAKING 030 Total EQ 1 7 94Hz –0.11kHz +1.00kHz +2. It makes the entire chorus much brighter.5 4.0dB PEAKING 025 Male Vocal 1 0.7 2.SHELF This is a variation on program 030.SHELF 028 Female Vocal 2 223Hz –0.5dB H. 6.2 944Hz 0.11kHz +3.0dB L.6 2.0dB PEAKING 10 236Hz –5.7 1.0dB PEAKING 029 Chorus & Harmony 2.72kHz +2. HIGH PEAKING 0. or sax. try it with a compressor.67kHz +2.Arpeggio 2 L-MID PEAKING 4.45 397Hz +1.0dB PEAKING 027 Female Vocal 1 0. 6.11 6.23kHz +4.5dB PEAKING 7 4. This is a variation on program 025.0dB PEAKING 5.9kHz +6.0dB H. adjust the HIGH or H-MID frequency.5dB PEAKING 0.0dB PEAKING 0.Arpeggio 1 Q F G Q F G Q F G Q F G Q F G Q F G Q F G Q F G Q F G Q F G Q F G 66Hz +1.2 2.

adjust the parameters accordingly.SHELF This is a variation on program 005.0dB 12.4 20.65kHz +3.SHELF 039 Fine-EQ(Cass) 223Hz 0.0dB PEAKING 2.0dB PEAKING 4.5dB PEAKING 2. The low and mid range is removed. Note The EQ programs were programmed for recording acoustic musical instruments.0dB H.Appendix No Name Parameter LOW PEAKING 033 Bass Drum 3 Q F G Q F G Q F G Q F G Q F G Q F G Q F G Q F G 74Hz –1.5dB PEAKING 4. synthesizer.5dB PEAKING 1.1 4.00kHz +1.5dB PEAKING 037 Piano Low 10 187Hz –5.4 4. — Reference Guide Appendix– 5 .1 5. Emphasizes the mid and high range. 12.5dB L.72kHz +5.2 6.SHELF 034 Snare Drum 3 10 315Hz –10. Use for the high range of the piano sound when it is recorded in stereo.0dB PEAKING 0.00kHz 0.SHELF This is a variation on program 013.0dB H.0kHz 0.0dB H.0dB PEAKING 036 Piano 3 8 99Hz +4.23kHz +3.0dB PEAKING 7 707Hz –1. This is a variation on program 003.6kHz 0.8 4.6kHz +3.0dB 88Hz –9.5dB PEAKING 2. Use with program 037.63 2.0dB PEAKING 4. If you are using them for a sampler.9kHz 0.0dB H.23kHz +3.2 6.5 1.SHELF 035 Tom-tom 2 2 118Hz +3.52kHz +2.33kHz +2.2 5. Description This is a variation on program 001.0dB L-MID PEAKING H-MID PEAKING 0.37kHz +4.5dB PEAKING 10 472Hz –13.8 4.1kHz 0.5dB H.0dB PEAKING 0.3 397Hz +1.0kHz +2.SHELF Use for recording a voice reading a text.5 561Hz +2. 10.5 210Hz +1.5dB PEAKING 038 Piano High 10 187Hz –5. It creates rather thick sound. Use with program 038.5dB PEAKING 6.0dB L.SHELF Use for the low range of the piano sound when it is recorded in stereo.0dB PEAKING 9 2.0dB PEAKING 0.3 397Hz +1.5dB PEAKING 040 Narrator 4 105Hz –4.00kHz 0.5dB L.72kHz +6.0dB 10. 16.0dB PEAKING 1. or rhythm machine.0dB PEAKING 6. HIGH PEAKING 0.SHELF Use for recording to or from cassette tape to make the sound clearer.

Simulation of a metal-plate reverb unit. A Yamaha proprietary effect that produces a richer and more complex modulation than chorus.Filter Type CHORUS FLANGE SYMPHONIC PHASER AUTO PAN TREMOLO HQ. Delays # 08 09 10 11 12 Title Mono Delay Stereo Delay Mod. Modulation-type Effects # 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 Title Chorus Flange Symphonic Phaser Auto Pan Tremolo HQ. Three-tap delay (L. An effect which isolates only the early reflection (ER) component from reverberation.delay Delay LCR Echo Type MONO DELAY STEREO DELAY MOD. PITCH effect can be used only with Effect 2. GATE REVERB REVERSE GATE Description Reverb simulating a large space such as a concert hall. Effects programs that use the HQ. The signal can be fed back from left to right. even the modulation frequency can be controlled by modulation. Reverb-type Effects # 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 Title Reverb Hall Reverb Room Reverb Stage Reverb Plate Early Ref. Stereo phaser with 2–16 stages of phase shift.Pitch Dual Pitch Rotary Ring Mod. but a stable effect is produced.Appendix Preset Effects Programs The following table lists the preset effects programs. A type of ER designed for use as gated reverb. An effect that modifies the pitch by applying amplitude modulation to the frequency of the input.FILTER Three-phase stereo chorus. Reverb designed with vocals in mind. An effect which uses an LFO to modulate the frequency of the filter. On the AW4416. Reverb simulating the acoustics of a smaller space (room) than REVERB HALL. The well-known flanging effect. Stereo delay with additional parameters for more detailed control. Mod. producing a feeling of hardedged reverberation. R). Mono delay with modulation. Use when you don't need to use complex parameter settings. Simulation of a rotary speaker.PITCH (Effect 2 only) DUAL PITCH ROTARY RING MOD.DELAY DELAY LCR ECHO Description Mono delay with simple operation. and right to left. Stereo delay with independent left and right. Tremolo Only one note is pitch-shifted. A reverse-playback type ER. An effect which cyclically moves the sound between left and right. Stereo pitch shift with left and right pitches set independently. See “Effects Parameters” on page Appendix–8 for detailed parameter information. MOD. Gate Reverb Reverse Gate Type REVERB HALL REVERB ROOM REVERB STAGE REVERB PLATE EARLY REF. Description Appendix–6 — Reference Guide . C. A flashier effect than reverb is produced.

Rev->Pan Delay+ER. Responds to MIDI Note On velocity when SOURCE set to MIDI.FLANGE DYNA.Filter Type MULTI. Combined Effects # 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 Title Rev+Chorus Rev->Chorus Rev+Flange Rev->Flange Rev+Sympho.FILTER Description Three-band parallel filter (24 dB/octave). Delay+Rev Delay->Rev Dist->Delay Type REV+CHORUS REV->CHORUS REV+FLANGE REV->FLANGE REV+SYMPHO. Responds to MIDI Note On velocity when SOURCE set to MIDI.Filter Dyna. REV->SYMPHO. DELAY+REV DELAY->REV DIST->DELAY Reverb and chorus in parallel Reverb and chorus in series Reverb and flanger in parallel Reverb and flanger in series Reverb and symphonic in parallel Reverb and symphonic in series Reverb and auto-pan in parallel Delay and early reflections in parallel Delay and early reflections in series Delay and reverb in parallel Delay and reverb in series Distortion and delay in series Description Other Effects # 41 Title Multi. Rev->Sympho. Delay->ER. DELAY->ER. Dynamically controlled phase shifter. Dynamically controlled flanger.PHASER Description Dynamically controlled filter.Flange Dyna. — Reference Guide Appendix– 7 . Responds to MIDI Note On velocity when SOURCE set to MIDI.FILTER DYNA.Phaser Type DYNA. REV->PAN DELAY+ER.Appendix Distortion-type Effects # 24 25 Title Distortion Amp Simulate Type DISTORTION AMP SIMULATE Distortion Guitar Amp Simulator Description Dynamic Effects # 26 27 28 Title Dyna.

1–1.DLY HI.3 s (fs=48 kHz) EARLY REF.0–500. Random. Parameter REV TIME INI.0–100. 6.Appendix Effects Parameters REVERB HALL. and plate simulations.0 Thru.DLY DIFF. 100% = reverb) High-pass filter cutoff frequency Low-pass filter cutoff frequency Level at which gate kicks in Gate opening speed Gate open time Gate closing speed Mix balance of the effects and dry sounds 0–100 [%] *1. Range S-Hall.4 0–10 0–100% 0.0 kHz 50 Hz–16.GAIN HI.3–99. Spring 0. REVERB STAGE. Reverse.13 s (fs=44. Parameter TYPE ROOMSIZE LIVENESS INI.0 ms–42.1 kHz). Early reflections. room. 10 = live) Initial delay before reverb begins Reverb diffusion (left–right reverb spread) Reverb density Number of early reflections Feedback gain High-frequency feedback ratio High-pass filter cutoff frequency Low-pass filter cutoff frequency Mix balance of the effects and dry sounds Appendix–8 — Reference Guide . stage.1–2.02 ms–1.0 ms 0–100% Thru. DENSITY ER NUM. 0.1 kHz). L-Hall.0 kHz.0 kHz. 21 Hz–8.1–20. DENSITY E/R DLY E/R BAL.02 ms–2. 5. HPF LPF GATE LVL ATTACK HOLD DECAY MIX BAL.RATIO HPF LPF MIX BAL. Thru 0–100 [%] Description Type of early reflection simulation Reflection spacing Early reflections decay characteristics (0 = dead. FB.0–500.0 s 0. REVERB ROOM. 0.1–1. Plate. all with gates.0 ms 0.96 s (fs=48 kHz) *2.0 kHz 50 Hz–16.0 s (fs=44.0 ms 0–10 0–100% 1–19 –99 to +99% 0.0 0–10 0. 21 Hz–8. Thru OFF. Range 0.0 0.RATIO DIFF.RATIO LO. –60 to 0 dB 0–120 ms *1 *2 Description Reverb time Initial delay before reverb begins High-frequency reverb time ratio Low-frequency reverb time ratio Reverb diffusion (left–right reverb spread) Reverb density Delay between early reflections and reverb Balance of early reflections and reverb (0% = ER.0 ms–46. REVERB PLATE Hall.

Appendix GATE REVERB. Parameter DELAY L FB. Type-B Reflection spacing Early reflections decay characteristics (0 = dead.0 ms 0–10 0–100% 1–19 –99 to +99% 0.1–1. and early reflections with reverse gate.0–2730. Range 0.0 Thru.1–1.RATIO HPF LPF MIX BAL. Range 0.G R HI. REVERSE GATE Early reflections with gate. minus values for reverse-phase feedback) Right channel delay time Right channel feedback (plus values for normal-phase feedback. Thru 0–100 [%] Range Type-A.0 ms –99 to +99% 0. Thru 0–100 [%] Left channel delay time Left channel feedback (plus values for normal-phase feedback. 21 Hz–8.1–20. 10 = live) Initial delay before reverb begins Reverb diffusion (left–right reverb spread) Reverb density Number of early reflections Feedback gain High-frequency feedback ratio High-pass filter cutoff frequency Low-pass filter cutoff frequency Mix balance of the effects and dry sounds Description Type of early reflection simulation MONO DELAY Basic repeat delay.RATIO HPF LPF MIX BAL.G L DELAY R FB. 21 Hz–8.0 0–10 0.0 kHz.0–1350.DLY DIFF.GAIN HI.0 kHz 50 Hz–16.0 Thru. Parameter TYPE ROOMSIZE LIVENESS INI. minus values for reverse-phase feedback) High-frequency feedback ratio High-pass filter cutoff frequency Low-pass filter cutoff frequency Mix balance of the effects and dry sounds Description — Reference Guide Appendix– 9 . Parameter DELAY FB. FB.0 Thru. 0.0 kHz 50 Hz–16.0–1350.GAIN HI. 21 Hz–8.0 ms –99 to +99% 0.0 kHz.0–500. Thru 0–100 [%] Delay time Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback.1–1. minus values for reverse-phase feedback) High-frequency feedback ratio High-pass filter cutoff frequency Low-pass filter cutoff frequency Mix balance of the effects and dry sounds Description STEREO DELAY Basic stereo delay.0 ms –99 to +99% 0. DENSITY ER NUM.RATIO HPF LPF MIX BAL.0 kHz.0 kHz 50 Hz–16.

minus values for reverse-phase feedback) Left to right channel feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback.0 kHz.0–2730.0 kHz 50 Hz–16.0 ms –99 to +99% 0.0–1350.0 Thru.DLY FB.0–1350.0–2730.1–1. minus values for reverse-phase feedback) High-frequency feedback ratio High-pass filter cutoff frequency Low-pass filter cutoff frequency Mix balance of the effects and dry sounds Description Appendix–10 — Reference Guide .Appendix MOD.1–1. center.0 ms –99 to +99% –99 to +99% –99 to +99% 0.RATIO HPF LPF MIX BAL. 21 Hz–8.G R L->R FBG R->L FBG HI.0–1350. Parameter DELAY FB.0 ms –99 to +99% 0. Thru 0–100 [%] Delay time Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback.RATIO FREQ.DLY L FB.0 ms 0.0 0. Range 0.0 kHz. Thru 0–100 [%] Left channel delay time Left channel feedback delay time Left channel feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback.0 ms –100 to +100% –100 to +100% –100 to +100% 0. minus values for reverse-phase feedback) High-frequency feedback ratio High-pass filter cutoff frequency Low-pass filter cutoff frequency Mix balance of the effects and dry sounds Description ECHO Stereo delay with crossed feedback loop.0 kHz 50 Hz–16. right).0–2730. Thru 0–100 [%] Left channel delay time Center channel delay time Right channel delay time Left channel delay level Center channel delay level Right channel delay level Feedback delay time Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback. Parameter DELAY L DELAY C DELAY R LEVEL L LEVEL C LEVEL R FB.0 ms 0.RATIO HPF LPF MIX BAL. Parameter DELAY L FB. Range 0.0 ms 0.0 kHz.0 ms –99 to +99% 0.00 Hz 0–100% Thru.DLY R FB.0–2725.0 ms 0.0–1350.1–1. minus values for reverse-phase feedback) High-frequency feedback ratio Modulation speed Modulation depth High-pass filter cutoff frequency Low-pass filter cutoff frequency Mix balance of the effects and dry sounds Description DELAY LCR Three-tap delay (left. minus values for reverse-phase feedback) Right to left channel feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback. 21 Hz–8.GAIN HI. 21 Hz–8.0 kHz 50 Hz–16.0 Thru.0–2730.DELAY Basic repeat delay with modulation.05–40. Range 0.GAIN HI. DEPTH HPF LPF MIX BAL.G L DELAY R FB. minus values for reverse-phase feedback) Right channel delay time Right channel feedback delay time Right channel feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback.

0–500.10 50. MOD.0 k [Hz] –12 to +12 [dB] 0–100 [%] Range 0.0–500. AM DEP. 0–100% 0.0 k [Hz] –12 to +12 [dB] 0–100 [%] Range 0.00 Hz Modulation speed Pitch modulation depth Amp modulation depth Modulation delay time Modulation waveform Low-shelving filter frequency Low-shelving filter gain Parametric equalizer center frequency Parametric equalizer gain Parametric equalizer band width High-shelving filter frequency High-shelving filter gain Mix balance of the effects and dry sounds Description FLANGE Flange effect.0 ms Sine. Tri 21.05–40.00 k [Hz] –12 to +12 [dB] 10–0. Parameter FREQ.0 ms –99 to +99% Sine.DLY WAVE LSH F LSH G EQ F EQ G EQ Q HSH F HSH G MIX BAL.DLY FB.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed Modulation depth Modulation delay time Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback. 0–100% 0–100% 0.00 k [Hz] –12 to +12 [dB] 100–8. minus values for reverse-phase feedback) Modulation waveform Low-shelving filter frequency Low-shelving filter gain Parametric equalizer center frequency Parametric equalizer gain Parametric equalizer band width High-shelving filter frequency High-shelving filter gain Mix balance of the effects and dry sounds Description — Reference Guide Appendix– 11 . Tri 21.10 50. PM DEP.2–8.0–16.0–16.GAIN WAVE LSH F LSH G EQ F EQ G EQ Q HSH F HSH G MIX BAL.00 k [Hz] –12 to +12 [dB] 10–0.00 k [Hz] –12 to +12 [dB] 100–8. DEPTH MOD.2–8. Parameter FREQ.Appendix CHORUS Chorus effect.

Turn L.0–16.10 50. Tri.0 ms Sine.05–40. 0–100% *1 Range 0.DLY WAVE LSH F LSH G EQ F EQ G EQ Q HSH F HSH G MIX BAL. DEPTH DIR. 8.2–8. L<—R. Parameter FREQ.00 k [Hz] –12 to +12 [dB] 50.00 Hz Modulation speed Modulation depth Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback. WAVE LSH F LSH G EQ F EQ G EQ Q HSH F HSH G MIX BAL. 0–100% 0. Parameter FREQ. 4.0 k [Hz] –12 to +12 [dB] 0–100 [%] Range 0.05–40. DEPTH MOD.00 Hz Modulation speed Modulation depth Modulation delay time Modulation waveform Low-shelving filter frequency Low-shelving filter gain Parametric equalizer center frequency Parametric equalizer gain Parametric equalizer band width High-shelving filter frequency High-shelving filter gain Mix balance of the effects and dry sounds Description PHASER 16-stage phaser. L—>R.Appendix SYMPHONIC Symphonic efect.0–500.2–8. 16 21.0–16. Tri 21.00 k [Hz] –12 to +12 [dB] 10–0.00 k [Hz] –12 to +12 [dB] 100–8.10 50.05–40. Parameter FREQ.2–8. DEPTH FB.0 k [Hz] –12 to +12 [dB] 0–100 [%] Range 0. 10. minus values for reverse-phase feedback) Lowest phase-shifted frequency offset Number of phase shift stages Low-shelving filter frequency Low-shelving filter gain High-shelving filter frequency High-shelving filter gain Mix balance of the effects and dry sounds Description AUTOPAN Auto-panner. L<->R. 0–100% –99 to +99% 0–100 2.00 k [Hz] –12 to +12 [dB] 100–8. 12.00 k [Hz] –12 to +12 [dB] 10–0. 14.GAIN OFFSET STAGE LSH F LSH G HSH F HSH G MIX BAL.0–16. Turn R Appendix–12 — Reference Guide . Square 21.0 k [Hz] –12 to +12 [dB] 0–100 [%] Low-shelving filter frequency Low-shelving filter gain Parametric equalizer center frequency Parametric equalizer gain Parametric equalizer band width High-shelving filter frequency High-shelving filter gain Mix balance of the effects and dry sounds *1.00 Hz Modulation speed Modulation depth Panning direction Modulation waveform Description Sine.

0 ms –99 to +99% 1–10 0–100 [%] Pitch shift Pitch shift fine Delay time Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback.0 ms –99 to +99% –100 to +100% 1–10 0–100 [%] Channel 1 pitch shift Channel 1 pitch shift fine Channel 1 panpot Channel 1 delay time Channel 1 feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback.00 k [Hz] –12 to +12 [dB] 100–8.0 k [Hz] –12 to +12 [dB] 0–100 [%] Range 0. Parameter PITCH 1 FINE 1 PAN 1 DELAY 1 FB. Range –12 to +12 semitones –50 to +50 cents 0. 0–100% Sine.PITCH (Effect 2 only) High-quality pitch shifter. Parameter FREQ. DEPTH WAVE LSH F LSH G EQ F EQ G EQ Q HSH F HSH G MIX BAL.G 2 LEVEL 2 MODE MIX BAL. R1–16 0. Parameter PITCH FINE DELAY FB.05–40. C.0 ms –99 to +99% –100 to +100% –24 to +24 semitones –50 to +50 cents L16–1. minus values for reverse-phase feedback) Channel 1 level (plus values for normal phase. minus values for reverse-phase feedback) Channel 2 level (plus values for normal phase.GAIN MODE MIX BAL.00 k [Hz] –12 to +12 [dB] 10–0.10 50.0–1000. Range –24 to +24 semitones –50 to +50 cents L16–1.0–16. C. R1–16 0.0–1000. minus values for reverse-phase feedback) Pitch shift precision Mix balance of the effects and dry sounds Description DUAL PITCH Twin-voice pitch shifter. Square 21. Tri.2–8. minus values for reverse phase) Pitch shift precision Mix balance of the effects and dry sounds Description — Reference Guide Appendix– 13 . minus values for reverse phase) Channel 2 pitch shift Channel 2 pitch shift fine Channel 2 panpot Channel 2 delay time Channel 2 feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback.00 Hz Modulation speed Modulation depth Modulation waveform Low-shelving filter frequency Low-shelving filter gain Parametric equalizer center frequency Parametric equalizer gain Parametric equalizer band width High-shelving filter frequency High-shelving filter gain Mix balance of the effects and dry sounds Description HQ.0–1000.G 1 LEVEL 1 PITCH 2 FINE 2 PAN 2 DELAY 2 FB.Appendix TREMOLO Tremolo effect.

DST2. Parameter ROTATE SPEED DRIVE ACCEL LOW HIGH SLOW FAST MIX BAL. high pass. 0–100% LPF.00 Hz Modulation speed Modulation depth Filter type: low pass. HPF.GATE MIX BAL. Parameter SOURCE OSC FREQ FM FREQ FM DEPTH MIX BAL.0–3000. FAST 0–100 0–10 0–100 0–100 0.38° 0–100 0–100 [%] Range 0. Range DST1. START SLOW.00–354. BPF 0–100 0–20 0.05–10.05–40. band pass Filter frequency offset Filter resonance Left-channel modulation and right-channel modulation phase difference Output level Mix balance of the effects and dry sounds Description DISTORTION Distortion effect. Range STOP. OVD2. OVD1.Appendix ROTARY Rotary speaker simulator.00 Hz 0–100% 0–100 [%] Oscillator frequency Oscillator frequency modulation speed Oscillator frequency modulation depth Mix balance of the effects and dry sounds Description Modulation source: oscillator or input signal MOD. Parameter FREQ. SELF 0. start Rotation speed (see SLOW and FAST parameters) Overdrive level Accelation at speed changes Low-frequency filter High-frequency filter SLOW rotation speed FAST rotation speed Mix balance of the effects and dry sounds Description RING MOD. Range OSC.05–10. Ring modulator.FILTER LFO modulation-type filter. PHASE LEVEL MIX BAL.0 Hz 0. Parameter DST TYPE DRIVE MASTER TONE N.05–40.00 Hz 0. OVD = overdrive) Distortion drive Master volume Tone Noise reduction Mix balance of the effects and dry sounds Appendix–14 — Reference Guide . DEPTH TYPE OFFSET RESO. CRUNCH 0–100 0–100 –10 to +10 0–20 0–100 [%] Description Distortion type (DST = distortion.00 Hz 0–100 [%] Rotation stop.

3 s (fs=48 kHz) — Reference Guide Appendix– 15 . *1 Range Guitar amp simulation type Description DST1.Appendix AMP SIMULATE Guitar Amp Simulator.0 s (fs=44. OVD = overdrive) Noise reduction Distortion drive Master volume Speaker cabinet simulation depth Bass tone control Middle tone control High tone control Parametric equalizer frequency Parametric equalizer gain Parametric equalizer bandwidth Mix balance of the effects and dry sounds *1. Parameter AMP TYPE DST TYPE N.10 0–100 [%] Distortion type (DST = distortion. CMB-TW. OVD1. DIR.0 kHz –12 to +12 dB 10. CMB-VR. THRASH. DOWN *1 Range INPUT. 0–100 LPF. MINI. DECAY LEVEL MIX BAL. Parameter SOURCE SENSE TYPE OFFSET RESO.FILTER Dynamically controlled filter. CRUNCH 0–20 0–100 0–100 0–100% 0–100 0–100 0–100 99–8. STK-M1. FLAT DYNA. HPF. BPF 0–100 0–20 UP. MIDI Sensitivity Filter type Filter frequency offset Filter resonance Description Control source: input signal or MIDI note on velocity Upward or downward frequency change Filter frequency change decay speed Output Level Mix balance of the effects and dry sounds 0–100 0–100 [%] *1. CMB-DX. MIDBST. 6.0 ms–42.1 kHz). 5. OVD2.0 ms–46.GATE DRIVE MASTER CAB DEP BASS MIDDLE TREBLE EQ F EQ G EQ Q MIX BAL.0–0. DST2. STK-M2. CMB-PG.

12.1 kHz). DECAY LSH F LSH G HSH F HSH G MIX BAL.1 kHz). 6.0 k [Hz] –12 to +12 [dB] 0–100 [%] *1. 14. 10. DECAY LSH F LSH G EQ F EQ G EQ Q HSH F HSH G MIX BAL.2–8.3 s (fs=48 kHz) DYNA. minus values for reverse-phase feedback) Lowest phase-shifted frequency offset Number of phase shift stages Upward or downward frequency change Decay speed Low-shelving filter frequency Low-shelving filter gain High-shelving filter frequency High-shelving filter gain Mix balance of the effects and dry sounds 21.0 ms–42.0–16. 5.0 ms–42. 0–100 –99 to +99% 0–100 UP.GAIN OFFSET DIR. DOWN *1 Range INPUT. 6.00 k [Hz] –12 to +12 [dB] 10–0.GAIN OFFSET STAGE DIR.2–8.0 ms–46. 16 UP. MIDI Sensitivity Description Control source: input signal or MIDI note on velocity Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback.00 k [Hz] –12 to +12 [dB] 50.0 s (fs=44.FLANGE Dynamically controlled flanger.0–16. MIDI Sensitivity Description Control source: input signal or MIDI note on velocity Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback.3 s (fs=48kHz) Appendix–16 — Reference Guide . 0–100 –99 to +99% 0–100 2.0 ms–46.0 s (fs=44.00 k [Hz] –12 to +12 [dB] 100–8.10 50.PHASER Dynamically controlled phaser. Parameter SOURCE SENSE FB.Appendix DYNA. Parameter SOURCE SENSE FB. 5. 4. DOWN *1 Range INPUT. 8.0 k [Hz] –12 to +12 [dB] 0–100 [%] *1. minus values for reverse-phase feedback) Delay time offset Upward or downward frequency change Decay speed Low-shelving filter frequency Low-shelving filter gain Parametric equalizer center frequency Parametric equalizer gain Parametric equalizer band width High-shelving filter frequency High-shelving filter gain Mix balance of the effects and dry sounds 21.

Range 0.0 0–10 0–100% Thru.DLY HI.0 ms 0. DENSITY HPF LPF FREQ. 100% = reverb) Mix balance of the effects and dry sounds Description REV->CHORUS Reverb and chorus effects in series.0–500. Thru 0. Parameter REV TIME INI.0–500. 21 Hz–8. Thru 0.DLY HI.1–1. PM DEP.0 ms Sine.0 kHz 50 Hz–16.05–40.DLY WAVE REV/CHO MIX BAL. Tri 0–100% 0–100 [%] Reverb time Initial delay before reverb begins High-frequency reverb time ratio Reverb diffusion (left-right reverb spreed) Reverb density High-pass filter cutoff frequency Low-pass filter cutoff frequency Modulation speed Pitch modulation depth Amp modulation depth Modulation delay time Modulation waveform Reverb and chorus balance (0% = chorus.05–40. Parameter REV TIME INI. DENSITY HPF LPF FREQ.9 s 0.0 kHz 50 Hz–16.3–99. MOD.0 0–10 0–100% Thru.0–500.0 kHz.RATIO DIFF.DLY WAVE REV/CHO MIX BAL.0 ms 0.0–500. Range 0.00 Hz 0–100% 0–100% 0. 100% = reverb) Mix balance of the effects and dry sounds Description — Reference Guide Appendix– 17 . MOD.0 kHz.9 s 0. AM DEP. Tri 0–100% 0–100 [%] Reverb time Initial delay before reverb begins High-frequency reverb time ratio Reverb diffusion (left-right reverb spreed) Reverb density High-pass filter cutoff frequency Low-pass filter cutoff frequency Modulation speed Pitch modulation depth Amp modulation depth Modulation delay time Modulation waveform Reverb and chorused reverb balance (0% = chorused reverb.RATIO DIFF.0 ms Sine.3–99.1–1. 21 Hz–8. AM DEP. PM DEP.00 Hz 0–100% 0–100% 0.Appendix REV+CHORUS Reverb and chorus effects in parallel.

1–1. DEPTH MOD.GAIN WAVE REV/FLG MIX BAL.DLY FB.0 kHz 50 Hz–16. Tri 0–100% 0–100 [%] Reverb time Initial delay before reverb begins High-frequency reverb time ratio Reverb diffusion (left-right reverb spreed) Reverb density High-pass filter cutoff frequency Low-pass filter cutoff frequency Modulation speed Modulation depth Modulation delay time Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback.1–1.DLY HI.DLY HI. DEPTH MOD.0 0–10 0–100% Thru.9 s 0. Tri 0–100% 0–100 [%] Reverb time Initial delay before reverb begins High-frequency reverb time ratio Reverb diffusion (left-right reverb spreed) Reverb density High-pass filter cutoff frequency Low-pass filter cutoff frequency Modulation speed Modulation depth Modulation delay time Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback.0–500.RATIO DIFF.0 kHz.0 ms –99 to +99% Sine. Parameter REV TIME INI. Parameter REV TIME INI. Range 0.9 s 0.0 ms 0. minus values for reverse-phase feedback) Modulation waveform Reverb and flanged reverb balance (0% = flanged reverb. 21 Hz–8.0 kHz.05–40. MIX BAL.RATIO DIFF.GAIN WAVE REV/FLG.0–500.Appendix REV+FLANGE Reverb and flanger effects in parallel. Thru 0.0–500. DENSITY HPF LPF FREQ. 100% = reverb) Mix balance of the effects and dry sounds Description REV->FLANGE Reverb and flanger effects in series.0 ms 0. 21 Hz–8.3–99.05–40.0 0–10 0–100% Thru.0 kHz 50 Hz–16.DLY FB.3–99. 100% = reverb) Mix balance of the effects and dry sounds Description Appendix–18 — Reference Guide .00 Hz 0–100% 0.00 Hz 0–100% 0. Range 0.0 ms –99 to +99% Sine.0–500. DENSITY HPF LPF FREQ. minus values for reverse-phase feedback) Modulation waveform Reverb and flange balance (0% = flange. Thru 0.

9 s 0. Thru 0. Range 0.0–500. DENSITY HPF LPF FREQ. 21 Hz–8. Range 0.0 0–10 0–100% Thru. Reverb and symphonic effects in series. 21 Hz–8.0–500. DENSITY HPF LPF FREQ.00 Hz 0–100% 0. Thru 0.1–1.0 kHz.RATIO DIFF.0 ms Sine.0 ms 0. Parameter REV TIME INI.0 kHz 50 Hz–16.DLY HI.0 ms Sine.1–1.0 0–10 0–100% Thru. DEPTH MOD.DLY WAVE REV/SYM MIX BAL.3–99. 100% = reverb) Mix balance of the effects and dry sounds Description — Reference Guide Appendix– 19 .0 kHz 50 Hz–16.0–500.3–99. Tri 0–100% 0–100 [%] Reverb time Initial delay before reverb begins High-frequency reverb time ratio Reverb diffusion (left-right reverb spreed) Reverb density High-pass filter cutoff frequency Low-pass filter cutoff frequency Modulation speed Modulation depth Modulation delay time Modulation waveform Reverb and symphonic balance (0% = symphonic.9 s 0. Parameter REV TIME INI.0 ms 0.05–40. 100% = reverb) Mix balance of the effects and dry sounds Description REV->SYMPHO. Reverb and symphonic effects in parallel.00 Hz 0–100% 0.0–500.05–40. Tri 0–100% 0–100 [%] Reverb time Initial delay before reverb begins High-frequency reverb time ratio Reverb diffusion (left-right reverb spreed) Reverb density High-pass filter cutoff frequency Low-pass filter cutoff frequency Modulation speed Modulation depth Modulation delay time Modulation waveform Reverb and symphonic reverb balance (0% = symphonic reverb.DLY WAVE REV/SYM MIX BAL.0 kHz.RATIO DIFF.DLY HI.Appendix REV+SYMPHO. DEPTH MOD.

0 kHz 50 Hz–16.1–20. L-Hall.00 Hz 0–100% *1 Description Reverb time Initial delay before reverb begins High-frequency reverb time ratio Reverb diffusion (left-right reverb spreed) Reverb density High-pass filter cutoff frequency Low-pass filter cutoff frequency Modulation speed Modulation depth Panning direction Modulation waveform Reverb and panned reverb balance (0% = panned reverb. Plate.0–1000.0 kHz.0 0–10 0–100% Thru. WAVE REV BAL.DLY HI.RATIO TYPE ROOMSIZE LIVENESS INI. 21 Hz–8.05–40. Range 0.0 0–10 0.0 ms 0. DENSITY ER NUM.0 kHz 50 Hz–16.0 ms 0–10 0–100% 1–19 Thru. Random.0 ms 0.3–99. Turn L. 100% = delay) Mix balance of the effects and dry sounds Description Appendix–20 — Reference Guide .0 ms 0.0–500.9 s 0.1–1.0 kHz. 21 Hz–8. L<->R. Thru 0. Thru 0–100% 0–100 [%] Left channel delay time Right channel delay time Feedback delay time Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback. Tri. L—>R. minus values for reverse-phase feedback) High-frequency feedback ratio Type of early reflection simulation Reflection spacing Early reflections decay characteristics (0 = dead. 100% = reverb) Mix balance of the effects and dry sounds Sine. HPF LPF DLY/ER MIX BAL.0–1000.DLY DIFF. Parameter REV TIME INI. 10 = live) Initial delay before reverb begins Reverb diffusion (left-right reverb spreed) Reverb density Number of early reflections High-pass filter cutoff frequency Low-pass filter cutoff frequency Delay and early reflections balance (0% = early reflections. Revers. Range 0. Square 0–100% 0–100 [%] *1.0 S-Hall.0–500.0–1000. Turn R DELAY+ER. Delay and early reflections effects in parallel.DLY FB. DEPTH DIR. Spring 0. Parameter DELAY L DELAY R FB.GAIN HI.RATIO DIFF. MIX BAL.0 ms –99 to +99% 0. DENSITY HPF LPF FREQ. L<—R.1–1.Appendix REV->PAN Reverb and auto-pan effects in parallel.

DLY REV HI DIFF.DLY DIFF.DLY FB.0 0–10 0–100% Thru.0–500. HPF LPF DLY/ER MIX BAL. Random. Range 0.0 ms 0.0 kHz 50 Hz–16.3–99.RATIO TYPE ROOMSIZE LIVENESS INI.0 ms 0.0 S-Hall.0 ms 0.0 ms 0.0–1000. 21 Hz–8.0 0–10 0. 21 Hz–8. 100% = delay) Mix balance of the effects and dry sounds Description DELAY+REV Delay and reverb effects in parallel. Plate.0–1000. Parameter DELAY L DELAY R FB. Range 0.0 ms 0–10 0–100% 1–19 Thru.0 ms 0.0 kHz 50 Hz–16. minus values for reverse-phase feedback) Delay high-frequency feedback ratio Reverb time Initial delay before reverb begins High-frequency reverb time ratio Reverb diffusion (left-right reverb spreed) Reverb density High-pass filter cutoff frequency Low-pass filter cutoff frequency Delay and reverb balance (0% = reverb.0–1000.DLY FB. DENSITY ER NUM.0 kHz.1–20.1–1. DENSITY HPF LPF DLY/REV MIX BAL.GAIN HI.1–1. Revers.GAIN DELAY HI REV TIME INI. Delay and early reflections effects in series.0 ms –99 to +99% 0. Parameter DELAY L DELAY R FB.Appendix DELAY->ER. 10 = live) Initial delay before reverb begins Reverb diffusion (left-right reverb spreed) Reverb density Number of early reflections High-pass filter cutoff frequency Low-pass filter cutoff frequency Delay and early reflected delay balance (0% = early reflected delay. Thru 0–100% 0–100 [%] Left channel delay time Right channel delay time Feedback delay time Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback.0–1000. Spring 0.9 s 0. L-Hall. minus values for reverse-phase feedback) High-frequency feedback ratio Type of early reflection simulation Reflection spacing Early reflections decay characteristics (0 = dead.1–1. Thru 0–100% 0–100 [%] Left channel delay time Right channel delay time Feedback delay time Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback.0–500.0 kHz. 100% = delay) Mix balance of the effects and dry sounds Description — Reference Guide Appendix– 21 .0–1000.0 0.0–1000.0 ms –99 to +99% 0.

00 Hz 0–100% 0–100% Description Distortion type (DST = distortion.0 ms –99 to +99% 0.0 ms 0.GAIN DELAY HI REV TIME INI. minus values for reverse-phase feedback) Delay high-frequency feedback ratio Reverb time Initial delay before reverb begins High-frequency reverb time ratio Reverb diffusion (left-right reverb spreed) Reverb density High-pass filter cutoff frequency Low-pass filter cutoff frequency Delay and delayed reverb balance (0% = delayed reverb. minus values for reverse-phase feedback) High-frequency feedback ratio Modulation speed Modulation depth Distortion and delay balance (0% = distortion.3–99.0 ms 0. Parameter DELAY L DELAY R FB. Thru 0–100% 0–100 [%] Left channel delay time Right channel delay time Feedback delay time Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback.0 kHz 50 Hz–16. Range 0.1–1.0 ms 0. 100% = delayed distortion) Appendix–22 — Reference Guide .GAIN HI.Appendix DELAY->REV Delay and reverb effects in series.0–1000. 21 Hz–8. OVD1. DENSITY HPF LPF DLY/REV MIX BAL.DLY REV HI DIFF.DLY FB.GATE DELAY FB.05–40. OVD = overdrive) Distortion drive Master volume Tone control Noise reduction Delay time Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback.0–500.0 0.RATIO FREQ.9 s 0. 100% = delay) Mix balance of the effects and dry sounds Description DIST->DELAY Distortion and delay effects in series.0–1000.0 ms –99 to +99% 0.0 kHz.0 0–10 0–100% Thru. Parameter DST TYPE DRIVE MASTER TONE N.0–2725.0 0.1–1. DEPTH DLY BAL Range DST1.0–1000.1–1. CRUNCH 0–100 0–100 –10 to +10 0–20 0. DST2. OVD2.

high pass. BPF HPF.0 kHz 28 Hz–16. 3 MIX BAL. Range HPF. band pass Filter 1 frequency Filter 2 frequency Filter 3 frequency Filter 1 level Filter 2 level Filter 3 level Filter 1 resonance Filter 2 resonance Filter 3 resonance Mix balance of the effects and dry sounds — Reference Guide Appendix– 23 . 2 RESO. band pass Filter 2 type: low pass. high pass. high pass. 3 LEVEL 1 LEVEL 2 LEVEL 3 RESO. 2 FREQ. 1 FREQ. LPF.Appendix MULTI FILTER Three-band parallel filter (24 dB/octave) Parameter TYPE 1 TYPE 2 TYPE 3 FREQ. BPF 28 Hz–16. LPF.0 kHz 0–100 0–100 0–100 0–20 0–20 0–20 0–100 [%] Description Filter 1 type: low pass. LPF.0 kHz 28 Hz–16. band pass Filter 3 type: low pass. BPF HPF. 1 RESO.

you can also use them creatively to shape the volume envelope of a sound.Pad SamplingPerc Sampling BD Sampling SN Hip Comp Solo Vocal1 Solo Vocal2 Chorus Compander(H) Compander(S) Click Erase Announcer Easy Gate BGM Ducking Limiter1 Limiter2 Total Comp1 Total Comp2 Total Comp3 "CMP "CMP "CPS "CMP "CMP "CPS "CMP "CMP "CMP "CPH "CPS "EXP "CPH "GAT "DUK "CPS "CMP "CMP "CMP "CMP Appendix–24 — Reference Guide .Dr. or duck the signals passing through the mixer. expand. compress-expand (compand).Bass Piano1 Piano2 E.Guitar Strings1 Strings2 Strings3 "CMP "EXP "GAT "CPH "CMP "EXP "GAT "CPS "EXP "CPS "CMP "CMP "CMP "CMP "CMP "CMP "CMP "CMP "CMP "CMP No 021 022 023 024 025 026 027 028 029 030 031 032 033 034 035 036 037 038 039 040 Program Name BrassSection Syn.Dr.Dr.SN A. The AW4416 features comprehensive dynamics processors for all the input channels.BD A.BD A.SN A.Dr. tape returns.Dr.SN A. No 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 009 010 011 012 013 014 015 016 017 018 019 020 Program Name A.Dr.Dr.Tom A.Dr. giving you unparalleled sonic quality and flexibility.B. However.BD A.B. gate.BD A.slap Syn.Dr.Dr. Preset Dynamics Programs These are the preset dynamics programs.Appendix Dynamics Processors Dynamics processors are generally used to correct or control signal levels.finger E. and the bus and stereo outputs. These processors allow you to compress.Guitar A.OverTop E.SN A.

the transition between uncompressed and compressed signal is immediate. 3.0. 2. These values are obtained when the sampling frequency is 48 kHz.Appendix Compressor dB +20 +10 0 -10 Compression ratio = 2:1 Output Level Threshold = -20dB -20 -30 -40 -50 -60 -70 dB -70 -60 -50 -40 -30 -20 -10 Input Level 0 +10 +20 A compressor provides a form of automatic level control.7.3. Out Gain sets the compressor’s output signal level. knee5.3.0. 2. Ratio controls the amount of compression—the change in output signal level relative to change in input signal level. 3. 1. a 10 dB change in input level (above the threshold) results in a 2 dB change in output level. 10. (160 points) (121 points) (36 points) (6 points) *1. thus effectively reducing the dynamic range.0.1 kHz. Out Gain can be used to counter this level reduction and set an appropriate level for the next stage in the audio path. With the softest knee.0.2. 20.3 8 ms to 63. The trigger signal is determined using the KEY IN parameter. By attenuating high levels.5. Compression tends to reduce the average signal level. With a fast attack time. Release determines how soon the compressor returns to its normal gain once the trigger signal level drops below the threshold. Knee = hard Compressor (CMP) parameters: Parameter Threshold (dB) Ratio Attack (ms) Outgain (dB) Knee Release (ms) –54 to 0 Value (55 points) 1. These values are obtained when the sampling frequency is 32 kHz Threshold determines the level of input signal required to trigger the compressor.5 6 ms to 46. 5. for example. 8. the signal is compressed almost immediately.1. If the release time is too short.0. the compressor makes it much easier to control signals and set appropriate fader levels. 6. 1. With a slow attack time. Knee sets the transition of the signal at the threshold. — Reference Guide Appendix– 25 . For a 5:1 ratio. Reducing the dynamic range also means that recording levels can be set higher. the compressor may not have time to recover before the next high level signal appears. 1. the initial transient of a sound passes through unaffected. the transition starts before the signal reaches the threshold and gradually ends above the threshold.0. Attack controls how soon the signal is compressed once the compressor has been triggered. a 10 dB change in input level (above the threshold) results in a 5 dB change in output level. With a 2:1 ratio. 1. the gain will recover too quickly causing level pumping—noticeable gain fluctuations.5.5. *3. These values are obtained when the sampling frequency is 44. sec*2. With a hard knee.0. *2. 4.4. ∞ (16 points) 0 to 120 0 to +18 hard. therefore improving the signal-to-noise performance. Signals at a level below the threshold pass through unaffected.4 sec*3 sec*1.1.0 5 ms to 42. and it will be compressed incorrectly. If it is set too long. Signals at and above the threshold level are compressed by the amount specified using the Ratio parameter.

Signals above the threshold pass through unaffected.5. for example.0.Appendix Expander dB +20 +10 0 Expansion ratio = 2:1 An expander is another form of automatic level control. Attack controls how soon the signal is expanded once the expander has been triggered. the transition between unexpanded and expanded signal is immediate. the initial transient of a sound passes through unaffected.0. *3.1 kHz. 1.1.5. Threshold = -10dB Knee = hard -10 Output Level -20 -30 -40 -50 -60 -70 Expander (EXP) parameters: Parameter Threshold (dB) –54 to 0 Value (55 points) 1. 1. With a 1:2 ratio. Appendix–26 — Reference Guide . With a slow attack time. 1. 8. The trigger signal is determined using the KEY IN parameter.5. the signal is expanded almost immediately. 4. 2. With a hard knee. By attenuating the signal below the threshold.3. ∞ (16 points) 0 to 120 0 to +18 hard. 6. Knee sets the transition of the signal at the threshold. Release determines how soon the expander returns to its normal gain once the trigger signal level drops below the threshold. a 2 dB change in input level (below the threshold) results in a 10 dB change in output level. Signals at and below the threshold level are attenuated by the amount specified using the Ratio parameter. With the softest knee.0.0. 2. knee5. Ratio controls the amount of expansion—the change in output signal level relative to change in input signal level. These values are obtained when the sampling frequency is 44. With a fast attack time.3 8 ms to 63. 1.4.4 sec*3 sec*1. These values are obtained when the sampling frequency is 48kHz.5 6 ms to 46. 10. the transition starts before the signal reaches the threshold and gradually ends above the threshold. *2. 5.1.0. the expander reduces low-level noise and effectively increases the dynamic range of the recorded material.7. (160 points) (121 points) (36 points) (6 points) dB -70 -60 -50 -40 -30 -20 -10 Input Level 0 +10 +20 Ratio Attack (ms) dB Outgain (dB) Knee Expansion ratio = 2:1 Knee = knee5 +20 +10 0 -10 Release (ms) Threshold = -20dB Output Level -20 -30 -40 -50 -60 -70 *1.3. For a 1:5 ratio.0. Out Gain sets the expander’s output signal level.2.0. sec*2. 3.0 5 ms to 42. 20. These values are obtained when the sampling frequency is 32 kHz dB -70 -60 -50 -40 -30 -20 -10 Input Level 0 +10 +20 Threshold determines the level of input signal required to trigger the expander. 3. a 5 dB change in input level (below the threshold) results in a 10 dB change in output level.

*3. 2. 20 (15 points) 0 to 120 –18 to 0 1 to 90 6 ms to 46. The compander attenuates the input signal above the threshold as well as the level below the width. Signals above the threshold pass through unaffected. 1. the compander is an expander-compressor-limiter. 3.5:1 for expansion.7.3 8 ms to 63. between the expander and the compressor.0. (160 points) (121 points) (36 points) (90 points) *1. 2. 3. 10. The trigger signal is determined using the KEY IN parameter.0. With a width of 90 dB.4 sec*3 sec*1. 6.0. Release determines how soon the compander returns to its normal gain once the trigger signal level drops below the threshold. With a smaller width (30dB) and a high threshold (0dB).5. These values are obtained when the sampling frequency is 48kHz. With a 2:1 ratio. 8.5. *2. With a slow attack time. the expander is effectively switched off and the compander is simply a compressor-limiter.1 kHz. Width is used to determine the distance. 1. With a fast attack time.1. a 10 dB change in input level (above the threshold) results in a 5 dB change in output level. sec*2. For very dynamic material. 4.Appendix Compander dB +20 +10 Width 0 -10 Output Level -20 -30 -40 -50 -60 -70 dB -70 -60 -50 -40 -30 -20 -10 Input Level 0 +10 +20 A compander is a compressor-expander—a combination of signal compression and expansion. Signals at and below the threshold level are attenuated by the amount specified using the Ratio parameter. These values are obtained when the sampling frequency is 44. this program allows you to retain the dynamic range without having to be concerned with excessive output signal levels and clipping. — Reference Guide Appendix– 27 .0. These values are obtained when the sampling frequency is 32 kHz Threshold determines the level of input signal required to trigger the compander. 1.3. The hard compander (CPH) has a fixed ratio of 5:1 for expansion and the soft compander (CPS) has a fixed ratio of 1.0. Ratio controls the amount of companding—the change in output signal level relative to change in input signal level. 1. for example. the initial transient of a sound passes through unaffected. Attack controls how soon the signal is companded once the compander has been triggered. in decibels. 5.0.0.0 5 ms to 42. the signal is companded almost immediately. Threshold CompanderH (CPH) and CompanderS (CPS) parameters: Parameter Threshold (dB) Ratio Attack (ms) Outgain (dB) Width (dB) Release (ms) –54 to 0 Value (55 points) 1. Out Gain sets the compander’s output signal level.5.

0. 6 ms to 46. It can be used to suppress background noise and hiss from valve (tube) amps. At a setting of 0 dB.13 sec*2.Appendix Gate and Ducking dB +20 +10 0 -10 Threshold = -10dB -20 -30 -40 -50 -60 -70 Range = -30dB A gate. It can be used to reduce the signal level rather than cut it completely. level of background music is automatically reduced. cutting off the signal. For ducking. Slow attack times can be used to remove the initial transient edge of percussive sounds. Hold sets how long the gate stays open or the ducking remains active once the trigger signal has fallen below the threshold level. Attack determines how fast the gate opens when the signal exceeds the threshold level. 0. At a setting of 0 dB. At a setting of –30 dB the signal is ducked by 30 dB. effects pedals. Signals at or below the threshold cause the gate to close. When signals are gated abruptly. the gate has no effect. Ducking is used to automatically reduce the levels of one signal when the level of a source signal exceeds a specified threshold.02 ms to 2. For ducking.. the duck has no effect. *2. the gate only closes so far allowing an attenuated signal through. Too fast an attack time may sound abrupt. a setting of –70 dB causes the signal to be virtually cutoff. the sudden cutoff can sound odd. These values are obtained when the sampling frequency is 44. It is used for voiceover applications where. and the signal level is reduced to a level set by the Range parameter.03 ms to 2.3s *1.94 sec*3 (216 points) 5ms to 42. the signal is ducked almost immediately. These values are obtained when the sampling frequency is 48kHz. With a slow attack time. For ducking.0 sec*2.4 sec *3. These values are obtained when the sampling frequency is 32 kHz Threshold sets the level at which the gate closes. At a setting of –30 dB. this controls how soon the signal is ducked once the duck has been triggered. trigger signal levels at and above the threshold level activate ducking. and microphones.02 ms to 1. *3. Signals above the threshold level pass through unaffected. At a setting of –70 dB. Range = -70dB dB Output Level -70 -60 -50 -40 -30 -20 -10 Input Level 0 +10 +20 Gate (GAT) and Ducking (DUK) parameters: Parameter Threshold (dB) –54 to 0 –70 to 0 0 to 120 Value (55 points) (71 points) (121 points) dB Range (dB) +20 +10 0 -10 Attack (ms) Hold (ms) Threshold = -20dB Output Level -20 -30 -40 -50 -60 -70 dB -70 -60 -50 -40 -30 -20 -10 Input Level 0 +10 +20 0. for example. 8 ms to 63.1 kHz. With a fast attack time. the gate closes completely when the input signal falls below the threshold. A longer decay time produces a more natural gating effect. Range controls the level to which the gate closes. Appendix–28 — Reference Guide . Decay controls how fast the gate closes once the hold time has expired. ducking fades the signal.. allowing the natural decay of an instrument to pass through. The trigger signal is determined using the KEY IN parameter. Too slow an attack time makes some signals sound backwards. or noise gate is an audio switch used to mute signals below a set threshold level. allowing an announcer to be heard clearly.96s*1. (160 points) Decay (ms) Range = -30dB *1.

— Reference Guide Appendix– 29 .1 kHz.SN "CMP Compressor Attack (ms) Outgain (dB) Knee Release (ms) Threshold (dB) Ratio ( :1) 006 A.5 8 3.5 2 70 –11 –53 0 1.5 1 –1.Dr. Preset Dynamics Program Parameters The “Release”.BD "CPH CompanderH Attack (ms) Outgain (dB) Width (dB) Release (ms) Threshold (dB) Ratio ( :1) 005 A.BD "CMP Compressor Attack (ms) Outgain (dB) Knee Release (ms) Threshold (dB) Ratio ( :1) 002 A. and “Decay” values shown in the following table are valid when the AW4416 is set at a sampling frequency of 44.SN "EXP Expander Attack (ms) Outgain (dB) Knee Release (ms) Threshold (dB) Range (dB) 007 A. Name Type Parameter Threshold (dB) Ratio ( :1) 001 A.5 2 12 –23 2 0 0.BD "EXP Expander Attack (ms) Outgain (dB) Knee Release (ms) Threshold (dB) Range (dB) 003 A.Dr.Dr. Gate for the same purpose as program 001.Appendix For ducking. Description Compressor that gives the best results with an acoustic bass drum. “Hold”. No. Compressor that gives the best results with an acoustic snare drum.SN "GAT Gate Attack (ms) Hold (ms) Decay (ms) Value –24 3 9 5.BD "GAT Gate Attack (ms) Hold (ms) Decay (ms) Threshold (dB) Ratio ( :1) 004 A.63 238 Gate for the same purpose as program 005.Dr. Expander for the same purpose as program 001.Dr. Hard compander for the same purpose as program 001.5 7 192 –17 2. Expander for the same purpose as program 005.7 1 3.Dr. this determines how soon the ducker returns to its normal gain after the hold time has expired.Dr.5 2 151 –8 –23 1 0.93 400 –11 3.5 2 58 –23 1.

Appendix–30 — Reference Guide . It automatically reduces the volume when the cymbals are not played.slap "CMP Compressor Attack (ms) Outgain (dB) Knee Release (ms) Threshold (dB) Ratio ( :1) 013 Syn.5 9 3.0 10 128 –20 2 2 5.Dr. Compressor to adjust and/or emphasize the level of a synth bass.SN "CPS CompanderS Attack (ms) Outgain (dB) Width (dB) Release (ms) Threshold (dB) Ratio ( :1) 009 A. Soft compander to emphasize the attack and ambience of cymbals using overhead microphones.0 2 749 –24 2 38 –3.Dr.7 6 4.7 11 0.Dr.5 2 470 –12 1.0 hard 133 –10 3. helping differentiate the bass and snare drums clearly.Tom "EXP Expander Attack (ms) Outgain (dB) Knee Release (ms) Threshold (dB) Ratio ( :1) 010 A.0 hard 250 –9 2. Expander for acoustic toms automatically reduces the volume when the toms are not played.5 17 1. Description Soft compander for the same purpose as program 005.0 hard 238 Compressor to brighten the tonal color of a piano.Appendix No.Bass "CMP Compressor Attack (ms) Outgain (dB) Knee Release (ms) Threshold (dB) Ratio ( :1) 014 Piano1 "CMP Compressor Attack (ms) Outgain (dB) Knee Release (ms) Value –8 1.finger "CMP Compressor Attack (ms) Outgain (dB) Knee Release (ms) Threshold (dB) Ratio ( :1) 012 E.OverTop "CPS CompanderS Attack (ms) Outgain (dB) Width (dB) Release (ms) Threshold (dB) Ratio ( :1) 011 E. Name Type Parameter Threshold (dB) Ratio ( :1) 008 A.B. Compressor to equalize the attack and volume level of a slap electric bass guitar Compressor to equalize the attack and volume level of a finger-picked electric bass guitar.B.5 54 842 –12 2 15 4. helping to differentiate the bass and snare drums clearly.

Appendix No.5 76 2. A variation on program 016. Name Type Parameter Threshold (dB) Ratio ( :1) 015 Piano2 "CMP Compressor Attack (ms) Outgain (dB) Knee Release (ms) Threshold (dB) Ratio ( :1) 016 E. adjusting the attack and entire level using a deeper threshold. Compressor for backing performances.0 2 174 –8 3.5 7 2. Compressor for string instruments.5 4 1.5 2 186 –18 1.35 S –17 1. intended for violas or cellos. Description A variation on program 014.5 2 238 –11 2 33 1.5 7 6.5 4 261 –10 2. A variation on program 018.5 5 1. such as electric rhythm guitar playing chords or arpeggios. such as cellos or contrabass.Guitar "CMP Compressor Attack (ms) Outgain (dB) Knee Release (ms) Threshold (dB) Ratio ( :1) 017 A. This program was intended for violins.5 2 749 –12 1.0 1 226 Compressor intended for brass sounds with fast and strong attack.Guitar "CMP Compressor Attack (ms) Outgain (dB) Knee Release (ms) Threshold (dB) Ratio ( :1) 018 Strings1 "CMP Compressor Attack (ms) Outgain (dB) Knee Release (ms) Threshold (dB) Ratio ( :1) 019 Strings2 "CMP Compressor Attack (ms) Outgain (dB) Knee Release (ms) Threshold (dB) Ratio ( :1) 020 Strings3 "CMP Compressor Attack (ms) Outgain (dB) Knee Release (ms) Threshold (dB) Ratio ( :1) 021 BrassSection "CMP Compressor Attack (ms) Outgain (dB) Knee Release (ms) Value –18 3.7 18 4. intended for acoustic guitar playing rhythm chords or arpeggios.5 93 1. intended for string instruments with a very low range. — Reference Guide Appendix– 31 . A variation on program 018.

0 1 342 –8 2.Pad "CMP Compressor Attack (ms) Outgain (dB) Knee Release (ms) Threshold (dB) Ratio ( :1) 023 SamplingPerc "CPS CompanderS Attack (ms) Outgain (dB) Width (dB) Release (ms) Threshold (dB) Ratio ( :1) 024 Sampling BD "CMP Compressor Attack (ms) Outgain (dB) Knee Release (ms) Threshold (dB) Ratio ( :1) 025 Sampling SN "CMP Compressor Attack (ms) Outgain (dB) Knee Release (ms) Threshold (dB) Ratio ( :1) 026 Hip Comp "CPS CompanderS Attack (ms) Outgain (dB) Width (dB) Release (ms) Threshold (dB) Ratio ( :1) 027 Solo Vocal1 "CMP Compressor Attack (ms) Outgain (dB) Knee Release (ms) Threshold (dB) Ratio ( :1) 028 Solo Vocal2 "CMP Compressor Attack (ms) Outgain (dB) Knee Release (ms) Value –13 2 58 2. Name Type Parameter Threshold (dB) Ratio ( :1) 022 Syn. A variation on program 023. Compressor for sampled sounds to boost them to be as powerful and clear as the acoustic sounds.7 8 –2. Description Compressor for synth pad. A variation on program 023. intended for sampled bass drum sounds. Compressor suited for a solo vocal source.5 26 1.0 1 238 –18 1.5 18 238 –14 2 2 3. intended for sampled sounds for loops.5 31 2. intended for sampled snare drum sounds. intended to prevent diffusion of the sound.Appendix No. This program is for percussion sounds.0 15 163 –20 2. A variation on program 023.0 hard 354 –23 20 15 0. Appendix–32 — Reference Guide .5 3 331 A variation on program 027.5 4 35 –18 4 8 8.

This program has a slow release. Expander to remove click track sounds that may bleed out of the monitor headphones the musicians are using. Hard compander reduces the level during the interval between the words.5 1 –2. Name Type Parameter Threshold (dB) Ratio ( :1) 029 Chorus "CMP Compressor Attack (ms) Outgain (dB) Knee Release (ms) Threshold (dB) Ratio ( :1) 030 Compander(H) "CPH CompanderH Attack (ms) Outgain (dB) Width (dB) Release (ms) Threshold (dB) Ratio ( :1) 031 Compander(S) "CPS CompanderS Attack (ms) Outgain (dB) Width (dB) Release (ms) Threshold (dB) Ratio ( :1) 032 Click Erase "EXP Expander Attack (ms) Outgain (dB) Knee Release (ms) Threshold (dB) Ratio ( :1) 033 Announcer "CPH CompanderH Attack (ms) Outgain (dB) Width (dB) Release (ms) Threshold (dB) Range (dB) 034 Easy Gate "GAT Gate Attack (ms) Hold (ms) Decay (ms) Threshold (dB) Range (dB) 035 BGM Ducking "DUK Ducking Attack (ms) Hold (ms) Decay (ms) Threshold (dB) Ratio ( :1) 036 Limiter1 "CMP CompanderS Attack (ms) Outgain (dB) Width (dB) Release (ms) Value –9 1. A template for the soft knee compander program.Appendix No. intended for chorus vocals.32 S –8 4 25 0. A template for the gate program. Description A variation on program 027.0 2 284 –14 2.5 2 226 –10 3. making the voice sound even.56 331 –19 –22 93 1.5 18 180 –26 –56 0 2.7 39 2. — Reference Guide Appendix– 33 .0 24 180 –33 2 1 2.0 6 250 –8 4 25 0. typically keyed from the announcer’s channel. Ducking background music for voiceovers.20 S 6. A template for the hard knee compander program.5 1 0.0 24 180 A template for a limiter using the soft compander program.

0 hard 319 –8 2.5 60 0. Name Type Parameter Threshold (dB) Ratio ( :1) 037 Limiter2 "CMP Compressor Attack (ms) Outgain (dB) Knee Release (ms) Threshold (dB) Ratio ( :1) 038 Total Comp1 "CMP Compressor Attack (ms) Outgain (dB) Knee Release (ms) Threshold (dB) Ratio ( :1) 039 Total Comp2 "CMP Compressor Attack (ms) Outgain (dB) Knee Release (ms) Threshold (dB) Ratio ( :1) 040 Total Comp3 "CMP Compressor Attack (ms) Outgain (dB) Knee Release (ms) Value 0 ∞ 0 0. Use for the stereo out during mixdown.12 S –18 3. Description A template for a limiter using the compressor program.0 2 1. It has a harder compression ratio. It is also interesting on stereo input signals. It has an extreme compression ratio. This program is a PEAK STOP type.5 94 2. Appendix–34 — Reference Guide . Compressor intended to reduce the overall volume level.0 1 180 A variation of program 038. almost a limiter in effect.Appendix No.5 hard 447 –16 6 11 6. A variation of program 038.

I Sound is too soft • Are the speakers or headphones connected correctly? • Is the volume of your amp or external equipment raised? • Is the [GAIN] control set correctly? • Is the fader of the input channel or monitor channel raised? • Is the fader of the stereo output channel raised? • The EQ gain may be set to an extremely low value. and turned off. • Did you record at an appropriate level? • Is the word clock setting correct for both the AW4416 and the external device(s)? • An effect such as Distortion or Amp Simulate may be in use. • Is the [GAIN] control set to an appropriate level? • Is the fader of the input channel or monitor channel raised? • Is the [ON] key of the input channel or monitor channel lit? • Is the fader of the stereo output channel raised? • Is the [ON] key of the stereo output channel lit? • Is the option card installed correctly? • Is the input/output patching set correctly? • Is the word clock set correctly? • The jack being used for input may have been assigned as an EFFECT INSERT return. • Has the internal hard disk been formatted appropriately? * * If an unformatted hard disk is installed. is it connected to the Hi-Z jack? • Check the level in the HOME screen.75 “HOME screen. • Is the [REC TRACK SELECT] key lit? I LCD display is dim or dark • Use the contrast knob located at the lower right of the screen to adjust the contrast. — Reference Guide Appendix–35 . asking you whether you wish to format the hard disk. For details refer to P. I Internal hard disk is not detected • Is the internal hard disk connected correctly? • The pins of the internal hard disk may have been deformed. • Is the virtual track set to the track that was recorded? • A region shorter than the specified region fade time cannot be played. • The fader of the input channel or monitor channel may be raised excessively. I Signal from the INPUT 8 jack is too loud • A conventional line-level signal may be connected to the Hi-Z jack. please refer to the following points and take the appropriate action.” • Is the attenuator of the EQ screen or VIEW screen raised? I Sound is distorted • Is the [GAIN] control set correctly? • The connection cable from the external device may be broken. I Input sound is not output • Are speakers or headphones connected correctly? • Is your amp and other external devices turned on? • Is the signal from the external device being input? • The connection cable from the external device may be broken. • The EQ gain may be excessively high. • The stereo output channel attenuator may be raised excessively. • The input monitor mode may be set to INPUT. • The stereo output channel fader may be raised excessively. a message will appear when the power is turned on. • Is the attenuator raised in the EQ screen or VIEW screen? I Recorded sound is not output • Has audio data been recorded on the recorder? • Muting may be enabled in the TRACK screen TR View page.Appendix Troubleshooting If the AW4416 does not operate as you expect. I Can’t hear the signal from the INPUT 1/2 jacks • An external effect unit may be connected to the INSERT jack. please contact your Yamaha dealer. I Can’t record • Is the internal hard disk connected? • Is there sufficient free space on the internal hard disk? • The song may be protected. or if you suspect a problem. I Power does not turn on • Is the power cable connected to an AC outlet of the correct voltage? • Is the POWER switch turned ON? • If the power still does not turn on. • The dynamics processor may be set to an extreme threshold or ratio. • If you are connecting an electric guitar.

I Can’t store a scene • Is the scene memory protected? • A scene cannot be stored in scene number 00. I Can’t save to a library • It is not possible to save to the factory-preset libraries. • Faders 9–14 cannot be operated when the mixing layer is 17–24/RTN. • When a file input/output page such as the SONG screen Song List page is displayed. Appendix–36 — Reference Guide .2 page is set to ENABLE. • Make sure that CD/DAT DIGITAL REC in the UTILITY screen Prefer. I Not all tracks will play back • There are limitations on the number of tracks that can be simultaneously recorded or played. is MTC Sync set to SLAVE? I MTC messages are received. and try again. • The meter display may be set to PRE FADER. • Also check the settings of the connected external MIDI devices. is PORT SELECT effect to MIDI? • In the MIDI screen MIDI Setup page. • Are monitor channels 1 and 2 raised? * * For STEREO track playback mode. I Can’t reproduce a scene • One or more channels may be set to Recall Safe. I Can’t change input patches during recording • The AW4416 may be set to record the digital input signal. • Is the power turned on for the transmitting and receiving devices? • Do the channel settings match for the transmitted and receiving devices? • In the MIDI screen MIDI Setup page. recording and playback are not possible. I Can’t recall a channel library to the stereo output channel • Channel libraries saved from other channels cannot be recalled to the stereo output channel. I Can’t record on the STEREO track • It is not possible to record on the STEREO track while recording on other tracks. are PROGRAM CHANGE TX and RX set to ON? • Is a scene assigned to the program change number being transmitted? I MIDI messages are looped • In the MIDI screen MIDI Setup page. I Can’t exchange MIDI data • Are the MIDI cables connected correctly? • A MIDI cable may be broken. I Can’t play back the STEREO track • Muting may be selected in the TRACK screen Stereo page.36) before using digital input signals. I Meters move even though the faders are lowered • The direct out setting may be PRE EQ or PRE FADER. I The volume of a particular channel increases or decreases • Are the dynamics processor settings appropriate? • EQ may have been recorded in the automix. the signal is output from monitor channels 1 and 2.2 page may be set to DISABLE. • Is the input signal routed appropriately to the recorder? * * If the signal is being input appropriately to the recorder. I Faders move to the lowest position on their own • Automix may have been recorded. pressing the [REC TRACK SELECT] key will cause the meter in the FL display to react. setting in the MIDI screen MIDI Sync page. but synchronization drifts • Is a large amount of MIDI data (notes etc.Appendix • The stereo track may be in playback mode. • If jumps occur in the synchronized time. • Is SYNC OUT set correctly? • Is MTC SYNC set to MASTER? I The AW4416 does not synchronize to incoming MTC messages • Is the MIDI cable connected to the MIDI IN connector? • In the MIDI screen MIDI Sync page.) being received together with the MTC messages? I MTC synchronization drifts • Does the frame rate match between the AW4416 and the external device? • SYNC OFFSET may have been set. ECHO may be turned ON. • CD/DAT DIGITAL REC in the UTILITY screen Prefer. • Please read and understand the copyright warning (¡ P. I Can’t recall a scene during recording • The AW4416 may be set to record the digital input signal.147 “Audio tracks”. change the SYNC AVE. Refer to Operation Guide P. • Make sure that CD/DAT DIGITAL REC is set to ENABLE. I MTC messages are not transmitted • Is the MIDI cable correctly connected to the MTC OUT connector? MTC is not transmitted from the MIDI OUT connector.

refer to page 99 “EDIT screen. HQ. refer to page 14.Pitch or Dual Pitch selected for a monitor channel? — Reference Guide Appendix–37 .RTN 1. I MMC is not transmitted • Is the MIDI cable connected to the MIDI OUT connector? • MMC messages are not transmitted from the MTC OUT connector. I Signal is delayed • Is the channel delay set correctly? I Automix cannot be recorded • Is automix set to ENABLE? • In the AUTOMIX screen. I MIDI data is not exchanged via the TO HOST connector • Is the cable correctly connected to the TO HOST connector? • PORT SELECT may be set to MIDI. • If the speed of your internal hard disk is slow. Pitch can be used only with EFFECT 2.. fader or EQ) you are operating? I Can’t use the internal effects • Effect BYPASS may be turned ON. I Sound recorded via the digital input sounds grainy • Is the dither setting appropriate? I Pairing was specified. the phase setting is not linked. or [REW] key are operated • Differences in the number of simultaneously played tracks will affect the way in which the sound is heard when these controls are operated.g.” I Pairing was specified. refer to page 39 “MIDI screen. is the REC or AUTO REC button turned ON? • Is the [SEL] key lit for the channel you are operating? • Is OVERWRITE turned ON for the control (e. problems may occur during recording and playback. Please use only the recommended internal hard disks. • Is the PORT SELECT setting appropriate for your computer? * * For details on this setting. 2 faders raised? • In the SETUP screen Patch IN page.Appendix I Something happens to the sound when the [DATA/JOG] dial. I The ON key and SEL key select the wrong channel • Is the appropriate mixing layer selected? I Noise is present in the recorded signal • Does the word clock setting match for the AW4416 and the external device(s)? • Is an unsynchronized signal being input? • Is the dither setting appropriate? • The oscillator may be functioning. I Metronome cannot be heard • The metronome sound is normally sent only to the MONITOR OUT and headphones. • Is an effect such as HQ. but the signal phase does not match • Even when channels are paired. * * Settings can also be made in the SETUP screen Patch IN page to assign the metronome to an output channel. [SHUTTLE] dial. I Moving a fader does not change the level • Is the appropriate fader mode and mixing layer selected? • The fader may be set to PRE FADE in AUX. • Is the SETUP screen Solo Setup page set appropriately? * * For details on the settings.” • A computer application other than your sequencer may be using the port.” I Playback pitch is wrong • VARI may be selected. • Are the EFF. I Editing results are not heard in the sound • Have you selected the virtual track that you recorded? • Are you using the appropriate editing command? * * For details on editing commands. • It is not possible to insert one effect into multiple channels. [FF] key. • 019. • Is the AW4416 operating on the same sampling frequency as the synchronized external device? • Is the master device operating in a stable way? • You may have executed the EDIT screen PITCH command. but the signal is monaural • Is the odd-numbered channel panned far left and the even-numbered channel panned far right? I Can’t edit a recorded track • Have you selected the virtual track that you recorded? I Fader groups and mute groups don’t work • In the EQ screen Fader Group page and Mute Group page. check that grouping is set to ENABLE. I Can’t use SOLO • The channel may be set to Solo Safe. “SETUP screen. EFFECT PATCH may be set to INSERT.

turn the AUTO PAN DISPLAY and AUTO EQ DISPLAY settings OFF.” I Song file size is unnaturally large • Even after you use recorder editing to erase a track etc. I The sound skips while playing an audio CD that you created • There may be differences in the quality of the completed CD depending on the type of CD-R media you use. * * For details on this setting. • The SONG screen Setting page may be set to MEASURE. Alternatively. I Audio recorded on CD-RW media does not play back on some players • In order for audio data recorded on CD-RW media to be played back. Execute the optimize operation in the SONG screen Song Edit page. • It is not possible to create an audio CD from a song whose Fs (sampling frequency) setting is 48 kHz. I The display indicates DISK BUSY during playback • It is possible that the reading speed of the internal hard disk is not fast enough. that sound file will be saved on the disk as an unused file. Appendix–38 — Reference Guide . If this occurs. • Is the SCSI cable connected correctly? • The pins of the SCSI cable may have been bent. I Can’t create an audio CD • Is CD-R media inserted? • The inserted CD-R may have already been finalized. the player must support CD-RW. I The display indicates MEMORY FULL or DISK FULL. data may be lost or the hard disk may be damaged. I The screen changes on its own when you operate the PAN or EQ encoders • In the UTILITY screen Prefer. are the signals from the sampling pads assigned to a channel? • The bank A/B setting may be incorrect. • Erase unneeded tracks and then execute Optimize to increase the available space. Contact the manufacturer of the player regarding CD-RW support. refer to page 1 “SONG screen. the start point may be specified. * * For details refer to page 33 “UTILITY screen. • Is a signal recorded on the stereo track? • The stereo track must be at least four seconds long. • Is the ID of the SCSI device set correctly? • Is termination specified correctly for the SCSI device? I Can’t save files on a SCSI device • Is there sufficient free space on the save destination media? • Has the save destination media been formatted appropriately? I Can’t load files from a SCSI device • Is there sufficient free space on the internal hard disk? I CD-RW drive is not recognized • Is the CD-RW drive connected correctly? I Can’t use the [DATA/JOG] dial to control onscreen parameters • The [NUM LOCATE] key may be on. backup the data. Please contact your Yamaha dealer. 1 page. I A device connected to the SCSI connector is not recognized • The power of the SCSI device may have been turned on after the AW4416. • If the display mode is set to REL (relative time). I Can’t save a file • Is there sufficient space on the internal hard disk? • Did you perform the correct shut-down procedure when you last turned off the power? * * If you turn off the power without performing the shut-down. • Does the display indicate DISK FULL? • Create sufficient space on the hard disk. • The [JOG ON] key may be on.Appendix I Counter display is not 0 when you return to the beginning of the song • The display mode may be set to REMAIN (remaining recording time). the internal battery may have run down. I An audio CD you created does not play back on a conventional player • An audio CD you created you not play back on a conventional player unless the disc has been finalized. or that the reading speed has slowed down because the recorded data has become fragmented.” I No sound from the sampling pads • In the SETUP screen Patch IN page. Try deleting small regions and re-recording. and recording or editing is not possible • Erase unneeded tracks and then execute Optimize to increase the available space. and try using one of the recommended hard disks. try using single speed (normal speed) recording rather than double-speed or faster recording.. I File date is not recorded correctly • Is the internal clock set to the correct date and time? * * If the date and time of the internal clock has drifted.

EFF1 INSERT RELEASED EFF2 INSERT RELEASED FOR EFFECT2 ONLY. OPTION I/O slot 1 and slot 2 cannot be used simultaneously. The signal being input from DIGITAL STEREO IN is not synchronized to the word clock master. Automix recording was stopped. Since sampling pad bank B is selected. Muting cannot be defeated since this would exceed the number of simultaneously playable tracks. Automix memory has no free area. Since sampling pad bank A is selected. and the data was discarded. and cannot be recorded. Since the AW4416 is in CD Play mode. The selected effect program can be used only with effect 2. It is not possible to specify a mark at an already-specified position.Appendix Display message list Messages AUTOMIX DISABLED. It cannot be set less than approximately 100 msec. CANNOT CHANGE THE MUTE CANNOT PLAY THIS PAGE CANNOT RECALL AUTOMIX CANNOT REDO CANNOT SELECT (MTC SLAVE) CANNOT SELECT (WC EXTERNAL) CANNOT SET MARK CANNOT UNDO CANNOT USE BOTH SLOTS! CD PLAY MODE NOW. and then playback. or the reading speed has slowed down because the recorded data has become fragmented. AUTOMIX MEMORY FULL! AUTOMIX NOT RUNNING. since automix data has not been stored. Effect 2 has been released from insertion because a patch library was recalled. Since the AW4416 is set to be the MTC slave. AUTOMIX RECORDING. the external word clock cannot be selected as the word clock source. this operation is not possible. AUTOMIX RUNNING. The reading speed of the internal hard disk is not fast enough. muting cannot be defeated for this pad. Since the external word clock is selected as the word clock source. The operation cannot be executed since automix is being recorded or played. muting cannot be defeated for this pad. the AW4416 cannot be set as the MTC slave. MTC of a different frame type than the internal setting is being received. cascading from DIGITAL STEREO IN to the stereo bus has been defeated. Recording is prohibited for the signal being input from DIGITAL STEREO IN. Undo (cancellation of an operation) is not possible. Redo (re-execution of an operation) is not possible. Playback is not possible in this page. so recording is not possible. The operation cannot be executed since automix is being recorded. Pause the recorder. DIFFERENT TC FRAME TYPE DIGITAL-ST-IN REC PROHIBIT. Recall is not possible. IN/OUT POINTS TOO CLOSE — Reference Guide Appendix–39 . Since the signal was interrupted. DIGITAL STEREO IN cannot be assigned to the stereo bus cascade. DIGITAL-ST-IN SYNC ERROR! DIN TO STEREO BUS REFUSE. Automix has been stopped. The auto punch-in/out interval is too short. Effect 1 has been released from insertion because a patch library was recalled. DISK BUSY Automix is not enabled. AUTOMIX REC ABORTED. BANK A SELECTED BANK B SELECTED CANNOT ASSIGN DIGITAL-ST-IN.

Invalid data may have been received at the MIDI IN connector. The AW4416 is attempting to transmit more MIDI data than it can handle. LOW BATTERY!! MAKE NEW MIX. The signal being input to the input jack of a card installed in OPTION I/O slot 2 is not synchronized to the word clock master. The operation cannot be executed because the recorder is operating. You located outside the top/end range of the song. SELECTED CH IS NONE. There are no events to be edited. The selected area contains no trigger data. Use the [SEL] keys to select the solo channel. The selected track does not contain recorded data. SELECTED SONG HAS NO REGION. SELECTED CH ONLY MODE. SONG TOP/END OUT OF RANGE STEREO PAIRED. It cannot be set to less than one second. The Solo status cannot be changed when the AW4416 is functioning as a cascade slave. The signal being input to the input jack of a card installed in OPTION I/O slot 1 is not synchronized to the word clock master. Appendix–40 — Reference Guide . There is no valid automix data. You are attempting to defeat ST LINK for the dynamics of paired channels. No sample is assigned to the selected sampling pad. The mark has been erased. The AW4416 is receiving more MIDI data than it can handle. since the display mode is set to SELECTED CH ONLY. The selected channel cannot be selected since it does not exist. NO MARK LEFT PLAY TRACK MUTE IS ON RECORDER BUSY RECORDER RUNNING REDO COMPLETE REPEAT POINTS TOO CLOSE SELECTED AREA HAS NO DATA. Since data has not been stored. The mark has been set. SELECTED PAD NOT ASSIGNED.Appendix INT. The repeat interval is too short. Invalid data may have been received at the MIDI IN connector. The channel cannot be changed. Playback tracks were muted because the allowable number of simultaneously recorded/played tracks was exceeded. The selected song does not contain a region. SELECTED AREA HAS NO REGION. The internal battery is running down. it cannot be recalled. Redo (re-execution of the previous operation) has been completed. The signal being input to the input jack of a card installed in an OPTION I/O slot is not synchronized to the word clock master. Please create a new mix. The selected area contains no region. MARK ERASED MARK SET MIDI IN: DATA FRAMING ERROR! MIDI IN: DATA OVERRUN! MIDI: RX BUFFER FULL! MIDI: TX BUFFER FULL! NO CURRENT AUTOMIX. SLOT1 INPUT SYNC ERROR! SLOT1. The operation cannot be executed because the recorder is recording or playing. NO DATA TO RECALL. The internal effect is connected to the AUX send. The maximum number of songs has been reached. The allowable number of marks has been exceeded. Press the Solo key on the master console. SONG NUMBER FULL. SELECTED TRACK NOT RECORDED. SOLO SLAVE. Please create a new mix. and cannot be inserted. SELECTED TRACK HAS NO REGION. The Solo function is ready. The selected track does not contain a region.2 INPUT SYNC ERROR! SLOT2 INPUT SYNC ERROR! SOLO READY.EFF NOW SELECTED AUX.

The AW4416 may be attempting to transmit excessive amounts of data from the TO HOST connector. Please exchange the media. Redo is not possible. Please exchange it. Since the disk is full. A problem has occurred with the SCSI device. — Reference Guide Appendix–41 . Change Media. The parameter setting exceeds the allowable range. Please exchange the media. Not TYPE 1 Backup. Invalid data may have been received at the TO HOST connector. Invalid data may have been received at the TO HOST connector. This editing operation cannot be executed on multiple songs simultaneously.Appendix STEREO TRACK MUTE IS OFF THIS SONG IS PROTECTED. and cannot be edited or recorded. Invalid data may have been received at the TO HOST connector. The currently loaded song cannot be deleted. Not 1st Media Change Media. This media was not backed up as TYPE 2. The word clock from a connected device selected by the AW4416 for synchronization is not appropriate. Please exchange the media. Change Media. The maximum number of tracks has been reached. The media is an incorrect type. The disk has no free capacity. The media has already been finalized. The order of media volumes is incorrect. Change Media. track muting cannot be turned off. Please Device Error! Directory Name Too Long! Directory Not Found! Disk Full! File System Error! Finalized Media! Invalid Parameter! A error occurred when accessing the CD. This song is protected. Optimize cannot be executed on a protected song. and further addition is not possible. Popup messages CD Access Error! CD Size Full! CD Track Over! Can’t Copy This Parameter! Can’t Create Image File! Can’t Delete Current Song! Can’t Delete Protected Song! Can’t Edit Multiple Songs! Can’t Optimize Protected Song! Can’t REDO Can’t Select Current Song! Can’t UNDO Change Media. a CD image file cannot be created. A sampling pad trigger list is being recorded. Data exceeding the recordable length of the CD cannot be added. A protected song cannot be deleted. TO HOST: DATA FRAMING ERROR! TO HOST: DATA OVERRUN! TO HOST: DATA PARITY ERROR! TO HOST: RX BUFFER FULL! TO HOST: TX BUFFER FULL! TRIGGER LIST RECORDING UNDO COMPLETE WRONG WORD CLOCK!! Since muting is off for the stereo track. Not TYPE 2 Backup. The currently loaded song cannot be edited. This parameter cannot be copied. The directory name is too long and cannot be displayed. Undo is not possible. An error has occurred in the file system of the internal hard disk. Please exchange the media. Excessive amounts of data may have been received at the TO HOST connector. Can’t Write CD-RW by Track At Once! A CD-RW cannot be written using Track At Once. This is not the first media volume. The specified directory cannot be found. Invalid Order. This media was not backed up as TYPE 1. Undo (cancellation of the previous operation) has been executed.

An error has occurred in the SCSI connection. The specified partition was not found. There are too many regions. Time compression/expansion cannot be executed since the region is too small. The media has no free space. The specified channel library cannot be loaded into this channel. There is no song to load. The file is not a WAV file. The track cannot be imported. There is no song to restore. No songs to write to the CD have been selected. The drive of the selected SCSI ID is not a CD drive. There is no song to backup. There is no stereo track. There is no song to save. since it is from a song with a different sampling frequency or quantization (bit length).Appendix Media Error! Media Full! Media Protected! Memory Full! No Song to Backup! No Song to Edit! No Song to Load! No Song to Restore! No Song to Save! No Song to Write! No Song! No Stereo Track! No Track to Open Wave Display! Not WAV Drive! Not WAV File! Partition Not Found! Recall Channel Data Conflict! SCSI Error! Selected Drive is not CD Drive! Selected Drive is not Connected! Selected Preset is Effect2 Only! Selected Song Status Conflict! Selected Track is not Recorded! Too Many Regions! Too Small Region! A problem has occurred on the media. The selected drive contains no WAV files. There is no track data for waveform display. There is no song to edit. No songs can be found. There is no free space in the sampling pad memory. The selected track is not recorded. The selected preset can be used only by effect 2. The drive of the selected SCSI ID is not connected. Appendix–42 — Reference Guide . The media is write-protected.

16 channels max. 28 channels 2 channels (stereo × 1) 4 channels 2 channels (stereo × 1) 2 channels (stereo × 1) 2 channels (stereo × 1) max. (16-bit/44. 128-times oversampling 32-bit Internal 44.5" IDE hard disk drive AW4416 original format 16-bit.1 kHz (–6%) to 48 kHz (+6%) max. 26 channels 8 channels 2 channels (stereo × 1) max. 24-bit Appendix–43 — Reference Guide .1 kHz) 2.Appendix Specifications General Specifications AD converter DA converter Internal processing Sampling frequency Audio input section MIC/LINE DIGITAL STEREO IN mini YGDAI card (option) Audio output section STEREO OUT OMNI OUT MONITOR OUT PHONES DIGITAL STEREO OUT mini YGDAI card (option) Mixing layer section Input channel Internal effect return Playback Internal effects section Multi-effects × 2 Bus section Bus Aux Stereo Solo Sampler section Assign to mixer section Playback Trigger pads Sampling time Recorder section Recording medium Sound file format Recording resolution 20 channels 8 channels 8 channels 2 channels (stereo × 1) 2 channels (stereo × 1) 24-bit linear. 16 channels 44 channels 24 channels 4 channels (stereo × 2) 16 channels (16 track direct out playback). 64-times oversampling 24-bit linear. 90 sec.1 kHz/48kHz External 44. or stereo 2 channels (stereo track playback) 8 voices 8 × 2 banks max.

MY8-AT. & Canada 120 V 80 W AC.5" hard disk adapter (ADP25H). mini YGDAI cards (MY8-AT. 2 (balanced. MY4-AD.1 inches) 11.0 × 147.8 kg (26 lbs) 5° to 35° C Removable 2. phone jack) 500 kΩ –46 dB to +4 dB –52 dB +20 dB Appendix–44 — Reference Guide . 50 Hz 558. TRS phone jack) –3 dB (clipping level) 3 kΩ –46 dB to +4 dB –52 dB +22 dB channel 8 (unbalanced. 2 (unbalanced.Appendix Tracks Maximum recording time Power requirements Dimensions (W × H × D) Weight Operating temperature range Options 130 tracks (16 tracks × 8 virtual tracks plus stereo track) Approx. MY4-DA). TRS phone jack) 10 kΩ 0 dB 600Ω 0 dB channel 3–8 (balanced. MY8-AE. 16-bit.1 kHz. MY8-TD.7 mm (22 x 5. Footswitch FC5 Mixer section I Input/output MIC/LINE input Channel 1.S.7 × 459. 60 Hz Europe 230 V 80 W AC.8 x 18. 12 GB hard disk) U. 16 tracks. XLR-type. TRS phone jack) +48 V DC phantom powering PEAK LED –3 dB (clipping level) Input impedance 3 kΩ Nominal input level –46 dB to +4 dB Minimum input level –52 dB Maximum input level +22 dB Insert I/O Input impedance Nominal input level Output impedance Nominal output level MIC/LINE input PEAK LED Input impedance Nominal input level Minimum input level Maximum input level MIC/LINE input (Hi-Z) Input impedance Nominal input level Minimum input level Maximum input level Channel 1. 140 min (44.A.

TRS phone jack) 150Ω 10 kΩ +4 dB +22 dB 1–4 (unbalanced. TRS phone jack) 8–40Ω 100 mW + 100 mW (40 Ω load) Coaxial (phono) Slot × 2 MY-8-AT (Adat) MY-8-TD (Tascam) MY-8-AE (AES/EBU) MY-8-AD (TRS phone jack × 8) MY-4-AD (XLR-type × 4) MY-4-DA (XLR-type × 4) Analog input Analog output I Digital mixer Input channel (channel 1–24. R Attenuator. Balance Attenuator Attenuator — Reference Guide Appendix–45 . bus. aux. EQ (4-band PEQ). Phase (normal. Bus assign (stereo. Bus assign (stereo. Delay. On/Off. reverse). playback 1–16) Attenuator. Pan. solo) Bus Stereo L. Dynamics. Phase (normal. Fader (60 mm motorized). Fader (60 mm motorized). direct out) Internal effects return Attenuator. bus. R (balanced. On/ Off. EQ (4-band PEQ). reverse). phono) 1 kΩ 10 kΩ –10 dBV +8 dBV L. R Bus 1–8 Aux 1–8 Solo L. aux. Pan. EQ (4-band PEQ). Dynamics. On/Off. phone jack) 1 kΩ 10 kΩ 0 dB +18 dB (unbalanced.Appendix STEREO OUT Output impedance Nominal load impedance Nominal output level Maximum output level MONITOR OUT Output impedance Nominal load impedance Nominal output level Maximum output level OMNI OUT Output impedance Nominal load impedance Nominal output level Maximum output level PHONES Nominal load impedance Maximum output level DIGITAL STEREO I/O Option card slot Digital I/O L. Delay. solo. Fader (60 mm motorized). R (unbalanced.

Appendix
Fader Frequency response Dynamic range
(20 kHz, LPF, IHF-A)

60 mm motorized × 17 +1, –3 dB, 20 Hz–20 kHz (MIC/LINE IN to STEREO OUT) 109 dB (typical) 104 dB (typical) DA converter (STEREO OUT) AD + DA (LINE IN to STEREO OUT)

Total harmonic distortion
(20 kHz, LPF)

Less than 0.02% @1 kHz (LINE IN to STEREO OUT)

Recorder section
I General
Recording resolution Sampling frequency 16-bit, 24-bit (set per song) 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz (set per song)

Maximum simultaneous recording tracks • 16 bit song
Simultaneous recording tracks 0–8 9–16 Simultaneous playback tracks 16 0

• 24 bit song
Simultaneous recording tracks 0 1–2 3–4 5–8 9–16 Simultaneous playback tracks 16 14 12 8 0

Tracks

130 tracks (16 tracks × 8 virtual tracks plus stereo track)

I Format
File system Internal hard disk drive Max. hard disk capacity Max. songs per hard disk AW4416 original format 2.5" IDE 64 GB (8 GB partition) Approx. 30,000 songs

I Edit
Song edit Track edit Part edit Name, comment, delete, copy, optimize, protect, fade in/out Name, erase, copy, exchange, slip, time compression/ expansion, pitch change, import Erase, delete, copy, move, insert, time compression/ expansion, pitch change

Appendix–46

— Reference Guide

Appendix
Region edit Erase, delete, copy, move, time compression/ expansion, pitch change, insert

I Others
Locate Direct locate: data entry search (time, measure) Quick locate: start, end, RTZ, A/B, last rec in/ out, roll back Manual punch I/O, auto punch I/O

Punch I/O

Controls
Analog section Input (channel 1–8) Input (channel 1, 2) Output Mixer section WORK NAVIGATE buttons UNIT buttons MIXER buttons FADER MODE buttons Gain (variable) +48 V (phantom switch) Phones level, monitor out level

SONG, QUICK REC, MASTERING, CD PLAY SETUP, FILE, UTILITY, MIDI VIEW, PAN, EQ, DYN AUX1, AUX2, AUX3, AUX4, AUX5, AUX6, AUX7, AUX8, HOME MIXING LAYER buttons 1–16, 17–24 RTN, MONI ON buttons, SEL buttons, Faders 1–8 channel 1–8, channel 17–24 9–14 channel 9–14 15 channel 15/return1 16 channel 16/return 2 17 stereo master SOLO buttons Function buttons SHIFT × 2, F1, F2, F3, F4, F5 EQ buttons HIGH, HI-MID, LO-MID, LOW Encoders PAN, Q, F, G 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, BANK, EDIT

Sampler section SAMPLING PAD buttons

Recorder section CUE button REC TRACK SELECT buttons 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, ST, ALL SAFE RECORDER buttons TRACK, EDIT Locate buttons NUM LOCATE, , , MARK, AUTO PUNCH, IN, OUT, SET, REPEAT, A, B, ROLL BACK, , RTZ, , CANCEL Transport buttons REW, FF, STOP, PLAY, REC

— Reference Guide

Appendix–47

Appendix
Others ABS/REL button, PEAK HOLD button, AUTOMATION button (AUTOMIX, SCENE), SCENE MEMORY button (STORE, RECALL, –, +), JOG ON button, UNDO button, REDO button, CURSOR button, ( , , , ), DATA ENTRY button (JOG/SHUTTLE), ENTER button 320 × 240 dots graphical LCD (with contrast control), 3-color FL display

Display

Control I/O
WORD CLOCK IN WORD CLOCK OUT MIDI IN MIDI OUT/THRU MTC OUT TO HOST SCSI MOUSE Foot switch BNC BNC 5-pin DIN 5-pin DIN 5-pin DIN 8-pin mini DIN 50-pin half pitch D-Sub 9-pin D-Sub Phone jack

Appendix–48

— Reference Guide

E3 and E4 — Reference Guide Appendix–49 . Inrush Current: 30A Conformed Environment: E1.1 7.6 450 459. E2.Appendix Dimensions 9.7 132.7 558 147. For European Model Purchaser/User Information specified in EN55103-1 and EN55103-2.7 Unit: mm Specifications and external appearance subject to change without notice.

However.5 MIDI CLOCK transmission If you select MIDI CLOCK transmission from the MIDI SETUP menu. note on/off messages can be received for control.4 EFFECT CONTROL Depending on the effect type. Program change messages are transmitted with the program number specified by the [MIDI Program Change Assign Table]. Internal settings and operations 2.5 THRU You can select whether the MIDI OUT/THRU connector will function as OUT or THRU. 1.1.2 SCENE CHANGE When a program change message is received.2 Control change If ECHO is on. the connector will function as THRU regardless of the PORT setting.4k for DOS/V Mac ToHost 31. Start/Stop/Continue commands will be transmitted by the corresponding operations. You can select either THRU or OUT as the function of the MIDI THRU/OUT connector. MMC commands will be transmitted according to operations of the transport.1. the AW4416’s internal recorder will operate in synchronization with the MTC messages received from the MIDI IN or TO HOST connector. If OMNI is turned on. When the AW4416 is in MIDI clock transmission mode. the transmission method must be selected appropriate for the other device.1. 2. This conversion is applied to both transmission and reception.3 MMC Device ID Specify the ID number used when transmitting and receiving MMC commands. If THRU is selected. a scene will be recalled as specified by the [MIDI Program Change Assign Table]. Regardless of which method is selected.1 Transmit channel Select the MIDI channel used for transmission. they will be echoed regardless of the channel. you must also select one of three settings as appropriate for the other device. These settings are made by the parameters of the corresponding effect. 1. these messages will be echoed regardless of the channel.25k for MIDI PC1 ToHost 31.25k for NEC PC9800series PC2 ToHost 38. ---------+-----------+----------+------------------------------MIDI MIDI 31.25k for Macintosh (contain CLOCK) 2.7 MTC slave synchronization If you select SLAVE operation from the MIDI SETUP menu. the lowest-numbered program change will be transmitted. 1. messages received at the MIDI IN connector will be retransmitted without change from the MIDI OUT/THRU connector. transmissions in response to requests are transmitted on the Receive Channel in order to specify the transmitting device.1 MIDI-SETUP 2.1 MIDI Channel 2. 2. MIDI messages are received only if the MIDI channel matches. The available methods are listed below.1.1.2. In general.1.1 MIDI-SETUP There are two types of serial connector: the MIDI connectors and the TO HOST.1.2 MIDI program change assign table The correspondence between program change numbers and scene numbers can be set freely. Name Connector Transmission speed Destination 1. 2. In order to function as MIDI OUT. If you select MMC MASTER from the MIDI SETUP menu.6 MTC master If you select MTC transmission from the MIDI SETUP menu.2 ON/OFF 2. If you select MMC SLAVE.4 PORT Select whether serial communication will use the MIDI IN/ OUT connectors or the TO HOST connector. If MIDI THRU is selected.1. messages received at the MIDI IN connector will be retransmitted without change from the MIDI OUT/THRU connector. program changes will be received regardless of their MIDI channel. 1.2.2 Receive channel Specify the MIDI channel used for reception. and MIDI Clock and Song Position Pointer messages will be transmitted according to the MIDI Tempo Map. 1.) If the TO HOST connector is selected. MTC will be transmitted during playback and recording. 2. If multiple program numbers are assigned to that memory number. the internal recorder will operate according to the MMC commands that are received. and you can select which type to use as appropriate for the connection destination. If THRU is selected. the PORT setting must be set to MIDI IN/ OUT. In the case of the TO HOST connector.1. but this is not the case if OMNI is turned on. 2. MIDI clock messages will be transmitted during playback and recording. 2. (MTC is always transmitted from the MTC OUT connector. Functions 1.1. 2.3 MMC CONTROL Basic recorder operations such as stop/play/rec/locate can be controlled. Both types use the MIDI format for communication.1 Program change Reception and transmission can be enabled or disabled. If ECHO is on.1. MTC is transmitted from the dedicated MTC OUT connector. Appendix–50 — Reference Guide .Appendix MIDI data format 1. They have the same functionality.

4 SYSTEM EXCLUSIVE MESSAGE 3.1. Quarter Frame messages will be transmitted according to the time code operation of the recorder.1 CHANNEL MESSAGE command rx/tx function -----+----------------------------+-------+------------------------------8n NOTE OFF rx Control internal effects 9n NOTE ON rx Control internal effects Bn CONTROL CHANGE Only echoed Cn PROGRAM CHANGE rx/tx Select scene memories (using the Program Change Table) 4.) STATUS DATA 1100nnnn Cn 0nnnnnnn nn Program Change Program No. — Reference Guide Appendix–51 .4. (If a memory number is recalled for which there is no setting in the [MIDI Program Change Assign Table]. STATUS DATA 1000nnnn 8n 0nnnnnnn nn 0vvvvvvv vv Note Off Message Note No. the lowest-numbered program will be transmitted. a recall operation will cause a program change to be transmitted on the [Tx CH] according to the settings of the [Program change table]. Velocity (1-127:On. program changes will be echoed.3 CONTROL CHANGE (Bn) < Reception > Echoed if [Control Change ECHO] is on. < Transmission > If [Control Change ECHO] is on. velocity will control the width of frequency modulation for both note-on and note-off.1 MMC command rx/tx function -----+----------------------------+-------+------------------------------01 STOP rx/tx Transport Stop 02 PLAY rx Transport Play 03 DEFERRED PLAY rx/tx Transport Play 04 FAST FOWARD rx/tx Transport Fast-forward 05 REWIND rx/tx Transport Rewind 06 RECORD STROBE rx Transport Record/Punchin 07 RECORD EXIT rx Transport Punch-out 0F RESET rx/tx MMC Reset 40 WRITE rx Write Information Field 44 LOCATE rx/tx Transport Locate < Transmission > If [Program Change TX] is on.2 NOTE ON (9n) < Reception > Received if [Rx CH] matches.4 PROGRAM CHANGE (Cn) < Reception > Received if [Program Change RX] is on and [Rx CH] matches.1 NOTE OFF (8n) < Reception > Received if [Rx CH] matches. Used to control effects. Velocity (ignored) 4. 1: Dynamic Flange / Dynamic Phase / Dynamic Filter If the SOURCE parameter is set to MIDI. If more than one program number is assigned to the memory number that was recalled. See below for details.3 SYSTEM REAL TIME MESSAGE command rx/tx function -----+----------------------------+-------+------------------------------F8 TIMING CLOCK tx MIDI Clock reception (when using MIDI Clock) FA START tx Start command transmission (when using MIDI Clock) FB CONTINUE tx Continue command transmission (when using MIDI Clock) FC STOP tx Stop command transmission (when using MIDI Clock) FE ACTIVE SENSING rx MIDI cable connection checking FF RESET rx Clear running status 4. 3. this is received regardless of the channel.4.2 SYSTEM COMMON MESSAGE command rx/tx function -----+----------------------------+-------+------------------------------F1 MIDI TIME CODE rx/tx MTC transmission (when MTC master). STATUS DATA 1001nnnn 9n 0nnnnnnn nn 0vvvvvvv vv Note On Message Note No. 3. If [Program Change ECHO] is on. same as note-off. If velocity is 0x00. this is merged with the AW4416’s own output while taking advantage of running status. However if [OMNI] is on. MTC reception (when MTC slave) F2 SONG POSITION POINTER tx SPP transmission (when using MIDI Clock) * Notes used to control effects. MIDI format details 4. This is echoed if [Program Change ECHO] is on. MIDI message formats 3.Appendix 3. < Reception > These messages are received if the AW4416 is operating as a MTC slave. 4. Quarter Frame messages received in realtime are assembled internally to create time code values that control the recorder. (0-127) 4. no program change will be transmitted.5 MIDI TIME CODE QUARTER FRAME (F1) < Transmission > When MTC transmission is selected and the recorder is in PLAY or REC status. Used to control effects. A scene memory will be recalled according to the [Program change table].1 Real Time System Exclusive 3. See below for details. 0:off) 3.

13. STATUS 11111110 FE Active Sensing < Reception > If the AW4416 is operating as the MMC SLAVE.2 MMC PLAY < Reception > If the AW4416 is operating as the MMC SLAVE.12 RESET < Reception > If a Reset message is received. this message is transmitted when the recorder begins playback or recording from a location other than the fi rst measure.5 MMC REWIND < Transmission > Transmitted with device number 7F when the REWIND key is pressed. 4. 7F:all call) Machine Control Command (mcc) sub-id Deferred play (MCS) End Of Exclusive 4. this message is transmitted when the recorder stops. Device ID Command 11110000 F0 01111111 7F 0ddddddd dd 00000110 06 00000110 04 11110111 F7 System Exclusive Message Real Time System Exclusive Destination (00-7E.4 MMC FAST FORWARD < Transmission > Transmitted with device number 7F when the FF key is pressed. Device ID Command 11110000 F0 01111111 7F 0ddddddd dd 00000110 06 00000101 05 11110111 F7 System Exclusive Message Real Time System Exclusive Destination (00-7E. STATUS ID No.8 START (FA) < Transmission > If MIDI Clock is being transmitted. 7F:all call) Machine Control Command (mcc) sub-id Play (MCS) End Of Exclusive 4.1 MMC STOP < Transmission > Transmitted with a device number of 7F when the STOP key is pressed. etc. MIDI communications will be initialized by clearing the running status. STATUS ID No.13.10 STOP (FC) < Transmission > If MIDI Clock is being transmitted. Timing Clock messages are transmitted according to the MIDI tempo map whenever the recorder is playing or recording (until it stops). STATUS ID No. it will begin playback when this message is received if the device number matches or is 7F. STATUS ID No.3 MMC DEFERRED PLAY < Transmission > Transmitted with device number 7F when the PLAY key is pressed. 4.6 SONG POSITION POINTER (F2) < Transmission > If MIDI Clock is being transmitted.13. < Reception > If the AW4416 is operating as the MMC SLAVE.13.Appendix STATUS DATA 11110001 F1 0nnndddd dd Quarter Frame Message nnn = message type (0-7) dddd = data Command 00000110 06 00000001 01 11110111 F7 Machine Control Command (mcc) sub-id Stop (MCS) End Of Exclusive 4. in order to indicate the song position at which playback should begin for the next Start/Continue. STATUS ID No. STATUS 11111100 FC Stop 4.13. STATUS 11111011 FB Continue EOX 4. Device ID 11110000 F0 01111111 7F 0ddddddd dd System Exclusive Message Real Time System Exclusive Destination (00-7E. an interval of 300 ms in which no message has been received will cause MIDI communications to be initialized by clearing the running status.11 ACTIVE SENSING (FE) < Reception > Once this message has been received. 7F:all call) Machine Control Command (mcc) sub-id Rewind (MCS) End Of Exclusive < Reception > If the AW4416 is operating as the MMC SLAVE. it will begin playback when this message is received if the device number matches or is 7F. STATUS 11111010 FA Start < Reception > If the AW4416 is operating as the MMC SLAVE. Device ID Command 11110000 F0 01111111 7F 0ddddddd dd 00000110 06 00000010 02 11110111 F7 System Exclusive Message Real Time System Exclusive Destination (00-7E.9 CONTINUE (FB) < Transmission > If MIDI Clock is being transmitted. Song Position Pointer messages will be transmitted when the recorder stops or locates. or when the shuttle is rotated toward the left to enter Review mode. STATUS 11111000 F8 Timing Clock EOX 4. it will stop when this message is received if the device number matches or is 7F. 4. etc. this message is transmitted when the recorder begins playback or recording from the first measure. it will begin fast-forward when this message is received if the device number matches or is 7F. 7F:all call) EOX Appendix–52 — Reference Guide . STATUS 11111111 FF Reset EOX 4. 7F:all call) Machine Control Command (mcc) sub-id Fast Forward (MCS) End Of Exclusive 4. it will begin rewind when this message is received if the device number matches or is 7F. Device ID Command 11110000 F0 01111111 7F 0ddddddd dd 00000110 06 00000011 03 11110111 F7 System Exclusive Message Real Time System Exclusive Destination (00-7E. STATUS DATA 11110010 F2 0ddddddd dd0 0ddddddd dd1 Song Position Pointer data (H) high 7 bits of 14 bits data data (L) low 7 bits of 14 bits data EOX 4.7 TIMING CLOCK (F8) < Transmission > If MIDI Clock is being transmitted.13 EXCLUSIVE MESSAGES (F0-F7) 4. or when the shuttle is rotated toward the right to enter Cue mode.

internal MMC-related settings will be reset to the power-on state. < Reception > If the AW4416 is operating as the MMC SLAVE and the device number of the message matches. the AW4416 will punch-out if it had been recording.7 MMC RECORD EXIT < Reception > If the AW4416 is operating as the MMC SLAVE and the device number of the message matches or is 7F.13. 7F:all call) Machine Control Command (mcc) sub-id Record Exit End Of Exclusive 4. when returning to the auto-punch pre-roll point.13. STATUS ID No. 7F:all call) Machine Control Command (mcc) sub-id Locate byte count "target" sub command hour(Standard Time Code) minute second frame sub-frame End Of Exclusive EOX 4. STATUS ID No. REC SELECT for the recorder tracks will be switched on/off according to the data of the standard track bitmap. Device ID Command 11110000 F0 01111111 7F 0ddddddd dd 00000110 06 00000110 06 11110111 F7 System Exclusive Message Real Time System Exclusive Destination (00-7E. End Of Exclusive — Reference Guide Appendix–53 . 7F:all call) Machine Control Command (mcc) sub-id Reset End Of Exclusive EOX EOX 4.10 MMC LOCATE (TARGET) < Transmission > This message will be transmitted with a device number of 7F when a locate-related key such as MARK SEARCH/IN/ OUT is pressed.. pairs as required.6 MMC RECORD STROBE < Reception > If the AW4416 is operating as the MMC SLAVE and the device number of the message matches or is 7F. STATUS ID No. Device ID Command 11110000 F0 01111111 7F 0ddddddd dd 00000110 06 01000100 00000110 00000001 0hhhhhhh 0mmmmmmm 0sssssss 0fffffff 0sssssss 11110111 44 06 01 hh mm ss ff ss F7 System Exclusive Message Real Time System Exclusive Destination (00-7E..13. it will begin recording if stopped. or when repeating.13. the AW4416 will locate to the time code location specifi ed by the command data of the message. or punch-in if playing. 7F:all call) Machine Control Command (mcc) sub-id Write Byte Count Writeable Information Field name Format defined by the Information Filed name More nn dd. Device ID Command 11110000 F0 01111111 7F 0ddddddd dd 00000110 06 01000000 40 0ccccccc cc 0nnnnnnn nn 0ddddddd dd : : 0nnnnnnn nn EOX 11110111 F7 System Exclusive Message Real Time System Exclusive Destination (00-7E.8 MMC RESET < Transmission > Transmitted with a device number of 7F when song loading is completed.TRACK RECORD READY < Reception > If the AW4416 is operating as the MMC SLAVE and the device number of the message matches. when a FF/REW/shuttle operation is performed.9. 01001111 4F 0nnnnnnn nn 0aaaaaaa aa 0bbbbbbb bb 0ccccccc cc Track Record Ready (Information Field name) Data Length (0:all track off. STATUS ID No..13.1 MMC INFORMATION FIELD . 7F:all call) Machine Control Command (mcc) sub-id Record strobe End Of Exclusive 4. Device ID Command 11110000 F0 01111111 7F 0ddddddd dd 00000110 06 00001101 0D 11110111 F7 System Exclusive Message Real Time System Exclusive Destination (00-7E. Device ID Command 11110000 F0 01111111 7F 0ddddddd dd 00000110 06 00000111 07 11110111 F7 System Exclusive Message Real Time System Exclusive Destination (00-7E. data will be written to the specified information field. 3:record track on) 1-2tr rec track On(Standard Track Bitmap) 3-9tr rec track On 10-16tr rec track On EOX 4. < Reception > If the AW4416 is operating as the MMC SLAVE and the device number of the message matches or is 7F. STATUS ID No.9 MMC WRITE < Reception > If the AW4416 is operating as the MMC SLAVE and the device number of the message matches or is 7F.13.Appendix 4.

Basic Channel Default Changed Default Messages Altered Date: 18 Feb. POLY Mode 3: OMNI OFF. POLY .0 Remarks Memorized Memorized Memorized MIDI Implementation Chart Transmitted 1–16 1–16 X X ************** X ************** X X X X X Recognized 1–16 1–16 OMNI off/OMNI on X X 0–127 X X X X X X Mode Note Number Velocity After Touch Pitch Bend :True Voice Note On Note Off Key’s Ch’s Control Change X X Prog Change :True# 0–127 ************** X O X X O O X X X X 0–127 0–96 O X X X X X X X O O *1 *2 System Exclusive System Common System Real Time :Song Pos :Song Sel :Tune :Clock :Commands :Local ON/OFF :All Notes OFF :Active Sense :Reset *2 *2 Aux Messages Notes MTC quarter frame message is transmitted. MONO Mode 4: OMNI OFF. 2000 Version: 1.(When MTC Sync mode) *1: MMC *2: When MCLK Sync mode Mode 2: OMNI ON.(When MTC Sync mode) MTC quarter frame message is recognized. MONO O: Yes X: No Mode 1: OMNI ON..YAMAHA [PROFESSIONAL AUDIO WORKSTATION] Model: AW4416 Function..

.AW4416 Block diagram STEREO L STEREO R SOLO R SOLO L AUX 1 MIC/LINE INPUT 48V PEAK AUX 6 AUX 7(EFF1) AUX 8(EFF2) 46 STEREO METER INSERT ATT 4BAND EQ METER (EQ) DYNAMICS METER DYNAMICS METER METER ON LEVEL BAL INPUT 1(..2) METER METER METER PREFADER LISTEN/ AFTER PAN SOLO METER LEVEL METER OPTION IN SLOT1 SLOT2 INSERT 8 8 8 2 2 2 DeEmp INSERT ATT 4 BAND EQ METER (EQ) INPUT DELAY PAN DeEmp ATT DeEmp METER METER (EQ) 4 BAND EQ INPUT DELAY METER ON LEVEL RECORDER INPUT 1~16 PAN LEVEL METER SOLO AUX1(. AUX8 (EFF2) INSERT SEND 2 46 EFFECT EFFECT METER EFFECT1~2 OSC ON ATT RECORDER DIRECT OUT 1 RECORDER DIRECT OUT 16 PHONES PHONES X2 STEREO L STEREO R MIXER SOLO Logic RECORDER TRACK CUE Logic MONITOR MONITOR OUT L +4dB R SOLO L DA SOLO R ON METRONOME ATT ........24) METER METER METER PREFADER LISTEN/ AFTER PAN SOLO INPUT 1-2 AD INSERT ON LEVEL BUS1 BUS2 BUS3 BUS4 BUS5 BUS6 BUS7 BUS8 SELECTED INSERT RETURNS .8) SOLO SAMPLING PAD EFFECT 1 EFFECT 2 DIGITAL STEREO IN METRONOME 8 CH DIRECT OUT1~16 16 2 SELECT BUS 1~8 16 DITHER Stereo in X 2 PRE/POST ON AUX RECORDER INPUT 1(.2 only) RECORDER RECORDER REPRO1-16 16 PAN SELECT RECORDER ST Trk L/R 2 RECORDER DIRECT OUT METER (Gain Reduction) PRE/POST ON AUX Mono in X 16 ENABLE DIGITAL STEREO L DIGITAL STEREO R (BUS CASCADE) METER ATT STEREO BUS1~8 AUX1~8 CH DIRECT OUT1~16 INSERT SEND RECORDER DIRECT OUT 1~16 STEREO BUS1~8 AUX1~8 CH DIRECT OUT1~16 INSERT SEND RECORDER DIRECT OUT 1~16 STEREO BUS1~8 AUX1~8 CH DIRECT OUT1~16 INSERT SEND RECORDER DIRECT OUT 1~16 STEREO BUS1~8 AUX1~8 CH DIRECT OUT1~16 INSERT SEND RECORDER DIRECT OUT 1~16 SELECT 2 8 8 16 46 16 2 8 8 16 46 16 2 8 8 16 46 16 2 8 8 16 46 16 STEREO OUT DA DA L 10dBV R 2 SELECT DITHER DIGITAL STEREO OUT METER 8 DITHER METER 8 DITHER METER SELECT OPTION OUT SLOT1 OUT X2 SLOT2 OUT OMNI OUT DA X4 0dB DA METER SELECT AUX7 (EFF1)....16) STEREO RECORDER MONI 1(. INSERT I/O PEAK ATT 4 BAND EQ METER (EQ) DYNAMICS INPUT DELAY PAN ATT 4BAND EQ METER (Gain Reduction) PRE/POST ON AUX METER METER (EQ) (Gain Reduction) CD-RW DRIVE CD PlayBack CD PLAY mode L R INPUT SELECT INPUT 3-8 AD Mono in X 24 DIRECT OUT (1~16 only) METER METER BUS1(.8) Hi-z 8 ch ONLY RETURN 1(..16) RETURN1 can not be assigned to AUX7 (EFF1) RETURN2 can not be assigned to AUX8 (EFF2) 16 RECORDER INPUT 1-16 (FL Display) METER METER METER PREFADER LISTEN/ AFTER PAN SOLO METER INPUT MONITOR INSERT ON ATT 4 BAND EQ METER (EQ) DYNAMICS INPUT DELAY LEVEL INPUT SELECT (1..

O. 430-8651. Hamamatsu.YAMAHA CORPORATION V566460 R1 1 IP 194 00 09 7000 AP Printed in Japan Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division P. Box 3. Japan .